Page 1 — RELION® PROTECTION AND CONTROL 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 4 Copyright This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party, nor used for any unauthorized purpose. The software or hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and may be used, copied, or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.
Page 5 In case any errors are detected, the reader is kindly requested to notify the manufacturer. Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use of this manual or the application of the equipment.
Page 6 (EMC Directive 2014/30/EU) and concerning electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2014/35/EU). This conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in accordance with the product standard EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and with the product standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive.
Page 7: Table Of Contents
Table of contents Table of contents Section 1 Introduction..............33 This manual..................33 Intended audience................33 Product documentation..............34 Product documentation set............34 Document revision history............34 Related documentation..............35 Symbols and conventions..............35 Symbols..................35 Document conventions..............35 Functions, codes and symbols............ 36 Section 2 620 series overview............45 Overview...................45 Product series version history.............
Page 8 Table of contents Functionality................78 Signals..................81 Settings..................82 Monitored data................83 Time synchronization................84 Time master supervision GNRLLTMS.........84 Function block................ 84 Functionality................84 Signals..................86 Settings.................. 86 Parameter setting groups..............86 Function block................86 Functionality................86 Test mode..................88 Function blocks................88 Functionality................88 Application configuration and Test mode........89 Control mode................
Page 9 Table of contents Signal outputs SO1 and SO2 in RTD0002......112 Signal outputs SO1, SO2, SO3 and SO4 in BIO0005..112 RTD/mA inputs................113 Functionality................113 Operation principle..............113 Selection of input signal type..........114 Selection of output value format...........114 Input linear scaling............... 115 Measurement chain supervision...........115 Self-supervision..............116 Calibration................
Page 10 Table of contents Function block..............132 Functionality................. 132 Signals..................133 GOOSERCV_DP function block..........133 Function block..............133 Functionality................. 133 Signals..................133 GOOSERCV_MV function block..........133 Function block..............133 Functionality................. 134 Signals..................134 GOOSERCV_INT8 function block..........134 Function block..............134 Functionality................. 134 Signals..................134 GOOSERCV_INTL function block..........135 Function block..............
Page 11 Table of contents Signals..................140 T_HEALTH function block............140 Function block..............140 Functionality................. 140 Signals..................141 T_F32_INT8 function block............141 Function block..............141 Functionality................. 141 Signals..................141 T_DIR function block..............142 Function block..............142 Functionality................. 142 Signals..................142 T_TCMD function block............. 142 Function block..............142 Functionality.................
Page 12 Table of contents Minimum pulse timer TPMGAPC......... 162 Pulse timer PTGAPC..............163 Function block..............163 Functionality................. 163 Signals..................164 Settings................164 Technical data..............165 Time delay off (8 pcs) TOFGAPC..........165 Function block..............165 Functionality................. 165 Signals..................166 Settings................166 Technical data..............167 Time delay on (8 pcs) TONGAPC..........167 Function block..............
Page 13 Table of contents Station authority level “L,R,L+R”.......... 178 Station authority level “L,S,R”..........179 Station authority level “L,S,S+R,L+S,L+S+R”...... 180 Signals..................182 Settings................183 Monitored data..............184 Generic control point (16 pcs) SPCGAPC.........185 Function block..............185 Functionality................. 185 Signals..................186 Settings................187 Remote generic control points SPCRGAPC......189 Function block..............
Page 14 Table of contents Clearing of record..............205 Configuration................205 Signals..................205 Settings..................206 Monitored data................219 ETHERNET channel supervision function blocks......219 Redundant Ethernet channel supervision RCHLCCH....219 Function block..............219 Functionality................. 219 Signals..................219 Settings................220 Monitored data..............220 Ethernet channel supervision SCHLCCH........220 Function block..............220 Functionality.................
Page 15 Table of contents Monitored data..............257 Technical data..............258 Three-phase directional overcurrent protection DPHxPDOC..259 Identification................. 259 Function block..............259 Functionality................. 259 Operation principle .............. 260 Measurement modes............265 Directional overcurrent characteristics ........ 265 Application................273 Signals..................275 Settings................276 Monitored data..............280 Technical data..............
Page 16 Table of contents Operation principle............... 319 Application................322 Signals..................323 Settings................323 Monitored data..............324 Technical data..............325 Technical revision history............. 325 Three-phase thermal overload protection, two time constants T2PTTR..................325 Identification................. 325 Function block..............325 Functionality................. 326 Operation principle............... 326 Application................329 Signals..................331 Settings................
Page 17 Table of contents Function block..............341 Functionality................. 342 Operation principle............... 342 Application................343 Signals..................344 Settings................344 Monitored data..............345 Technical data..............345 Thermal overload protection for motors MPTTR....... 345 Identification................. 345 Function block..............345 Functionality................. 346 Operation principle............... 346 Application................354 Signals..................358 Settings................
Page 18 Table of contents Signals..................396 Settings................397 Monitored data..............400 Technical data..............402 Technical revision history............. 403 Transient/intermittent earth-fault protection INTRPTEF.... 403 Identification................. 403 Function block..............404 Functionality................. 404 Operation principle............... 404 Application................409 Signals..................410 Settings................411 Monitored data..............411 Technical data..............412 Technical revision history.............
Page 19 Table of contents Signals..................453 Settings................453 Monitored data..............454 Technical data..............454 Wattmetric-based earth-fault protection WPWDE..... 455 Identification................. 455 Function block..............455 Functionality................. 455 Operation principle............... 456 Timer characteristics............462 Measurement modes............464 Application................464 Signals..................466 Settings................466 Monitored data..............467 Technical data..............468 Multifrequency admittance-based earth-fault protection MFADPSDE................468 Identification.................
Page 20 Table of contents Operation principle............... 508 Application................522 CT connections and transformation ratio correction.....537 Signals..................541 Settings................542 Monitored data..............544 Technical data..............546 Technical revision history............. 547 Numerical stabilized low-impedance restricted earth-fault protection LREFPNDF...............547 Identification................. 547 Function block..............547 Functionality................. 547 Operation principle...............
Page 21 Table of contents Settings................586 Monitored data..............587 Technical data..............588 Technical revision history............. 588 High-impedance/flux-balance based differential protection for motors MHZPDIF..............589 Identification................. 589 Function block..............589 Functionality................. 589 Operation principle............... 589 Application................590 Recommendations for current transformers ......593 Example calculations for high-impedance differential protection................597 Signals..................600 Settings................
Page 22 Table of contents Functionality................. 613 Operation principle............... 613 Application................614 Signals..................615 Settings................615 Monitored data..............615 Technical data..............616 Technical revision history............. 616 Negative-sequence overcurrent protection for machines MNSPTOC.................616 Identification................. 616 Function block..............616 Functionality................. 617 Operation principle............... 617 Timer characteristics............618 Application................623 Signals..................623 Settings................
Page 23 Table of contents Monitored data..............640 Technical data..............641 Three-phase undervoltage protection PHPTUV......641 Identification................. 641 Function block..............641 Functionality................. 641 Operation principle............... 642 Timer characteristics............646 Application................646 Signals..................647 Settings................647 Monitored data..............649 Technical data..............649 Technical revision history............. 649 Single-phase undervoltage protection PHAPTUV.....
Page 24 Table of contents Settings................664 Monitored data..............665 Technical data..............665 Technical revision history............. 665 Positive-sequence undervoltage protection PSPTUV....666 Identification................. 666 Function block..............666 Functionality................. 666 Operation principle............... 666 Application................668 Signals..................668 Settings................669 Monitored data..............669 Technical data..............670 Technical revision history.............
Page 25 Table of contents Settings................698 Monitored data..............699 Technical data..............699 Frequency protection..............700 Frequency protection FRPFRQ..........700 Identification................. 700 Function block..............700 Functionality................. 700 Operation principle............... 700 Application................704 Signals..................705 Settings................705 Monitored data..............706 Technical data..............706 Technical revision history............. 707 Load-shedding and restoration LSHDPFRQ......
Page 26 Table of contents Signals..................732 Settings................732 Monitored data..............733 Technical data..............733 Reverse power/directional overpower protection DOPPDPR..734 Identification................. 734 Function block..............734 Functionality................. 734 Operation principle............... 735 Application................738 Signals..................741 Settings................741 Monitored data..............742 Technical data..............742 Directional reactive power undervoltage protection DQPTUV...743 Identification.................
Page 27 Table of contents Monitored data................767 Technical data................768 Technical revision history............768 Multipurpose protection MAPGAPC..........768 Identification................768 Function block................768 Functionality................769 Operation principle..............769 Application................. 770 Signals..................771 Settings..................771 Monitored data................772 Technical data................772 Capacitor bank protection...............772 Three-phase overload protection for shunt capacitor banks COLPTOC.................
Page 28 Table of contents Application................798 Signals..................800 Settings................800 Monitored data..............801 Technical data..............801 Technical revision history............. 801 Section 5 Protection related functions..........803 Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR......... 803 Identification................803 Function block................803 Functionality................803 Operation principle..............803 Application................. 805 Signals..................806 Settings..................806 Monitored data................806 Technical data................
Page 29 Table of contents Operation principle..............823 Application................. 825 Signals..................826 Settings..................826 Monitored data................827 Technical revision history............827 Emergency start-up ESMGAPC............. 827 Identification................827 Function block................827 Functionality................827 Operation principle..............828 Application................. 829 Signals..................829 Settings..................829 Monitored data................830 Technical data................830 Technical revision history............830 Automatic switch-onto-fault logic CVPSOF........
Page 30 Table of contents Technical revision history............862 Circuit breaker uncorresponding position start-up UPCALH..863 Identification................863 Function block................863 Functionality................863 Operation principle..............863 Application................. 864 Signals..................865 Settings..................865 Technical data................865 Section 6 Supervision functions........... 867 Trip circuit supervision TCSSCBR..........867 Identification................
Page 31 Table of contents Current transformer supervision for high-impedance protection scheme HZCCxSPVC..............891 Identification................891 Function block................892 Functionality................892 Operation principle..............892 Measuring modes..............893 Application................. 894 Signals..................895 Settings..................896 Monitored data................897 Technical data................898 Technical revision history............898 Fuse failure supervision SEQSPVC..........898 Identification................
Page 32 Table of contents Operation counter..............916 Accumulation of I t..............917 Remaining life of circuit breaker........... 919 Circuit breaker spring-charged indication......920 Gas pressure supervision.............920 Application................. 921 Signals..................924 Settings..................926 Monitored data................927 Technical data................928 Technical revision history............928 Section 8 Measurement functions..........929 Basic measurements..............
Page 33 Table of contents Settings................947 Monitored data..............948 Technical data..............948 Technical revision history............. 949 Residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU......949 Identification................. 949 Function block..............949 Signals..................949 Settings................950 Monitored data..............950 Technical data..............950 Technical revision history............. 951 Frequency measurement FMMXU..........951 Identification.................
Page 34 Table of contents Technical revision history............. 962 Disturbance recorder RDRE............962 Functionality................962 Recorded analog inputs............963 Triggering alternatives............963 Length of recordings.............964 Sampling frequencies............965 Uploading of recordings............965 Deletion of recordings............966 Storage mode...............966 Pre-trigger and post-trigger data.......... 967 Operation modes..............967 Exclusion mode..............
Page 35 Table of contents Identification................993 Function block................993 Functionality................993 Operation principle..............994 Application................. 994 Signals..................994 Settings..................995 Monitored data................996 Technical revision history............996 Synchronism and energizing check SECRSYN......997 Identification................997 Function block................997 Functionality................997 Operation principle..............998 Application................1005 Signals..................1008 Settings..................1008 Monitored data.................1009...
Page 36 Table of contents Signals..................1040 Settings..................1041 Monitored data.................1043 Technical data................. 1045 Technical revision history............1045 Tap changer control with voltage regulator OLATCC....1045 Identification................1045 Function block................. 1046 Functionality................1046 Operation principle..............1046 Voltage and current measurements........1047 Tap changer position inputs..........1048 Operation mode selection..........
Page 37 Table of contents Settings..................1088 Monitored data.................1089 Technical revision history............1089 Voltage variation PHQVVR............1089 Identification................1089 Function block................. 1090 Functionality................1090 Operation principle..............1090 Phase mode setting............1091 Variation detection..............1091 Variation validation............. 1093 Duration measurement............1096 Three/single-phase selection variation examples....1097 Recorded data................. 1099 Application................
Page 38 Table of contents User programmable inverse-time characteristics for overvoltage protection............1161 IDMT curve saturation of overvoltage protection....1162 IDMT curves for undervoltage protection........ 1162 Standard inverse-time characteristics for undervoltage protection................1163 User-programmable inverse-time characteristics for undervoltage protection............1165 IDMT curve saturation of undervoltage protection..... 1166 Frequency measurement and protection........1166 Measurement modes..............1167 Calculated measurements............1169...
Page 39: Section 1 Introduction
Section 1 1MRS757644 F Introduction Section 1 Introduction This manual The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.
Page 40: Product Documentation
Content updated C/2015-07-15 Content updated D/2015-12-11 2.0 FP1 Content updated to correspond to the product series version E/2016-09-27 2.0 FP1 Content updated F/2019-06-19 2.0 FP1 Content updated Download the latest documents from the ABB Web site http://www.abb.com/substationautomation. 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 41: Related Documentation
Section 1 1MRS757644 F Introduction 1.3.3 Related documentation Product series- and product-specific manuals can be downloaded from the ABB Web site http://www.abb.com/substationautomation. Symbols and conventions 1.4.1 Symbols The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in electrical shock.
Page 42: Functions, Codes And Symbols
Section 1 1MRS757644 F Introduction To navigate between the options, use • Menu paths are presented in bold. Select Main menu/Settings. • LHMI messages are shown in Courier font. To save the changes in nonvolatile memory, select Yes and press •...
Page 43 Section 1 1MRS757644 F Introduction Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI Directional earth-fault protection, high DEFHPDEF1 Io>> -> (1) 67N-2 (1) stage Admittance-based earth-fault EFPADM1 Yo> -> (1) 21YN (1) protection EFPADM2 Yo> -> (2) 21YN (2) EFPADM3 Yo> -> (3) 21YN (3) Wattmetric-based earth-fault WPWDE1...
Page 44 Section 1 1MRS757644 F Introduction Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI Overexcitation protection OEPVPH1 U/f> (1) 24 (1) OEPVPH2 U/f> (2) 24 (2) Three-phase thermal protection for feeders, cables and distribution T1PTTR1 3Ith>F (1) 49F (1) transformers Three-phase thermal overload T2PTTR1 3Ith>T/G/C (1) 49T/G/C (1)
Page 45 Section 1 1MRS757644 F Introduction Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI Load-shedding and restoration LSHDPFRQ1 UFLS/R (1) 81LSH (1) LSHDPFRQ2 UFLS/R (2) 81LSH (2) LSHDPFRQ3 UFLS/R (3) 81LSH (3) LSHDPFRQ4 UFLS/R (4) 81LSH (4) LSHDPFRQ5 UFLS/R (5) 81LSH (5) LSHDPFRQ6 UFLS/R (6) 81LSH (6) Multipurpose protection...
Page 46 Section 1 1MRS757644 F Introduction Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI High-impedance differential HIAPDIF1 dHi_A> (1) 87A (1) protection for phase A High-impedance differential HIBPDIF1 87B (1) protection for phase B dHi_B> (1) High-impedance differential HICPDIF1 dHi_C> (1) 87C (1) protection for phase C Circuit breaker uncorresponding UPCALH1...
Page 47 Section 1 1MRS757644 F Introduction Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI Earthing switch indication ESSXSWI1 I <-> O ES (1) I <-> O ES (1) ESSXSWI2 I <-> O ES (2) I <-> O ES (2) ESSXSWI3 I <-> O ES (3) I <->...
Page 48 Section 1 1MRS757644 F Introduction Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI Sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI1 U1, U2, U0 (1) V1, V2, V0 (1) Three-phase power and energy PEMMXU1 P, E (1) P, E (1) measurement Load profile record LDPRLRC1 LOADPROF (1) LOADPROF (1) Frequency measurement FMMXU1...
Page 49 Section 1 1MRS757644 F Introduction Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI Integer value move MVI4GAPC1 MVI4 (1) MVI4 (1) MVI4GAPC2 MVI4 (2) MVI4 (2) MVI4GAPC3 MVI4 (3) MVI4 (3) MVI4GAPC4 MVI4 (4) MVI4 (4) Analog value scaling SCA4GAPC1 SCA4 (1) SCA4 (1) SCA4GAPC2 SCA4 (2)
Page 51: Section 2 620 Series Overview
Section 2 1MRS757644 F 620 series overview Section 2 620 series overview Overview 620 series is a product family of protection relays designed for the protection, control, measurement and supervision of utility substations and industrial switchgear and equipment. The design of the protection relays has been guided by the IEC 61850 standard for communication and interoperability of substation automation devices.
Page 52: Pcm600 And Ied Connectivity Package Version
REF620 Connectivity Package Ver.2.1 or later • REM620 Connectivity Package Ver.2.1 or later • RET620 Connectivity Package Ver.2.1 or later Download connectivity packages from the ABB Web site http://www.abb.com/substationautomation or directly with Update Manager in PCM600. Local HMI The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling the protection relay. The LHMI comprises the display, buttons, LED indicators and communication port.
Page 53: Leds
Section 2 1MRS757644 F 620 series overview Table 2: Display Rows in the view Characters per row Character size Small, mono-spaced (6 × 12 pixels) Large, variable width (13 × 14 pixels) 8 or more 1) Depending on the selected language The display view is divided into four basic areas.
Page 54: Programmable Push Buttons With Leds
Section 2 1MRS757644 F 620 series overview push buttons are also used to acknowledge alarms, reset indications, provide help and switch between local and remote control mode. A071176 V1 EN Figure 4: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push buttons and RJ-45 communication port 2.2.3.1 Programmable push buttons with LEDs...
Page 55: Web Hmi
Section 2 1MRS757644 F 620 series overview The buttons and LEDs are freely programmable, and they can be configured both for operation and acknowledgement purposes. That way, it is possible to get acknowledgements of the executed actions associated with the buttons. This combination can be useful, for example, for quickly selecting or changing a setting group, selecting or operating equipment, indicating field contact status or indicating or acknowledging individual alarms.
Page 56: Authorization
Administrator user rights. If the relay-specific Administrator password is forgotten, ABB can provide a one-time reliable key to access the protection relay. For support, contact ABB. The recovery of the Administrator password takes a few days. User authorization is disabled by default for LHMI but WHMI always uses authorization.
Page 57: Audit Trail
Section 2 1MRS757644 F 620 series overview Table 3: Predefined user categories Username User rights VIEWER Read only access OPERATOR • Selecting remote or local state with (only locally) • Changing setting groups • Controlling • Clearing indications ENGINEER • Changing settings •...
Page 58 Section 2 1MRS757644 F 620 series overview Table 4: Audit trail events Audit trail event Description Configuration change Configuration files changed Firmware change Firmware changed Firmware change fail Firmware change failed Setting group remote User changed setting group remotely Setting group local User changed setting group locally Control remote DPC object control remote...
Page 59: Communication
Section 2 1MRS757644 F 620 series overview Table 5: Comparison of authority logging levels Audit trail event Authority logging level Configurati Setting Setting Settings None on change group group, edit control Configuration change ● ● ● ● ● Firmware change ●...
Page 60: Self-Healing Ethernet Ring
Section 2 1MRS757644 F 620 series overview performance requirements for tripping applications in distribution substations, as defined by the IEC 61850 standard. The protection relay can support five simultaneous clients. If PCM600 reserves one client connection, only four client connections are left, for example, for IEC 61850 and Modbus.
Page 61: Ethernet Redundancy
Section 2 1MRS757644 F 620 series overview The Ethernet ring solution supports the connection of up to 30 protection relays. If more than 30 protection relays are to be connected, it is recommended that the network is split into several rings with no more than 30 protection relays per ring.
Page 62 Section 2 1MRS757644 F 620 series overview COM600 SCADA Ethernet switch Ethernet switch IEC 61850 PRP GUID-334D26B1-C3BD-47B6-BD9D-2301190A5E9D V3 EN Figure 8: PRP solution In case a laptop or a PC workstation is connected as a non-PRP node to one of the PRP networks, LAN A or LAN B, it is recommended to use a redundancy box device or an Ethernet switch with similar functionality between the PRP network and SAN to remove additional PRP information from the Ethernet frames.
Page 63: Process Bus
Section 2 1MRS757644 F 620 series overview GUID-207430A7-3AEC-42B2-BC4D-3083B3225990 V3 EN Figure 9: HSR solution 2.5.3 Process bus Process bus IEC 61850-9-2 defines the transmission of Sampled Measured Values within the substation automation system. International Users Group created a guideline IEC 61850-9-2 LE that defines an application profile of IEC 61850-9-2 to facilitate implementation and enable interoperability.
Page 64 Section 2 1MRS757644 F 620 series overview Common Ethernet Station bus (IEC 61850-8-1), process bus (IEC 61850-9-2 LE) and IEEE 1588 v2 time synchronization GUID-2371EFA7-4369-4F1A-A23F-CF0CE2D474D3 V5 EN Figure 10: Process bus application of voltage sharing and synchrocheck The 620 series supports IEC 61850 process bus with sampled values of analog currents and voltages.
Page 65: Secure Communication
Section 2 1MRS757644 F 620 series overview Primary Secondary IEEE 1588 v2 IEEE 1588 v2 master clock master clock (optional) Managed HSR Managed HSR Ethernet Ethernet switch switch IEC 61850 Backup 1588 master clock GUID-7C56BC1F-F1B2-4E74-AB8E-05001A88D53D V6 EN Figure 11: Example network topology with process bus, redundancy and IEEE 1588 v2 time synchronization The process bus option is available for all 620 series protection relays equipped with phase voltage inputs.
Page 67: Section 3 Basic Functions
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Section 3 Basic functions General parameters Table 6: Analog input settings, phase currents Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Primary current 1.0...6000.0 100.0 Rated primary current 2=1A 2=1A Rated secondary current Secondary current 3=5A Amplitude Corr A 0.9000...1.1000...
Page 68 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Table 8: Analog input settings, phase voltages Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 0.100...440.000 0.001 20.000 Primary rated voltage Primary voltage Secondary voltage 60...210 Secondary rated voltage VT connection 1=Wye 2=Delta Voltage transducer measurement 2=Delta connection 3=U12...
Page 69 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Local engineer Set password Local administrator Set password Remote viewer Set password Remote operator Set password Remote engineer Set password Remote administrator Set password Authority logging 1=None 4=Setting group, Authority logging level 2=Configuration...
Page 70 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Table 14: Binary input settings in card location Xnnn Value Unit Step Default Name Input m filter time 5…1000 Input m inversion 0= False 0=False 1= True 1) Xnnn = Slot ID, for example, X100, X110, as applicable 2) m = For example, 1, 2, depending on the serial number of the binary input in a particular BIO card Table 15: Ethernet front port settings...
Page 71 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Table 18: HMI settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description FB naming convention 1=IEC61850 1=IEC61850 FB naming convention used in IED 2=IEC60617 3=IEC-ANSI Default view 1=Measurements 1=Measurements LHMI default view 2=Main menu 3=SLD Backlight timeout 1...60 LHMI backlight timeout...
Page 72 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Frame1InUse -1=Not in use 6=Private frame 6 Active Class2 Frame 1 0=User frame 1=Standard frame 2=Standard frame 3=Standard frame 4=Standard frame 5=Standard frame 6=Private frame 6 7=Private frame 7 Frame2InUse -1=Not in use -1=Not in use...
Page 73 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Class1OvInfNo 0...255 Information Number for Class 1 overflow indication Class1OvBackOff 0...500 Backoff Range for Class1 buffer GI Optimize 0=Standard 0=Standard Optimize GI traffic behaviour behaviour 1=Skip spontaneous 2=Only overflown 3=Combined DR Notification...
Page 74 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start delay 0...20 Start delay in character times for serial connection End delay 0...20 End delay in character times for serial connections CRC order 0=Hi-Lo 0=Hi-Lo Selects between normal or swapped byte 1=Lo-Hi order for checksum for serial connection.
Page 75 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Table 22: DNP3 settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 5=off Operation Off / On 5=off Port 1=COM 1 3=Ethernet - TCP Communication interface selection 2=COM 2 3=Ethernet - TCP 1 4=Ethernet TCP +UDP 1 Unit address...
Page 76 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description UR Class 1 TO 0...65535 Max holding time for class 1 events to generate UR UR Class 2 Min events 0...999 Min number of class 2 events to generate UR Class 2 TO 0...65535 Max holding time for class 2 events to...
Page 77 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Default Var Obj 30 1=1:32bit AI 5=5:AI float 1=32 bit AI; 2=16 bit AI; 3=32 bit AI without 2=2:16bit AI flag; 4=16 bit AI without flag; 5=AI float; 3=3:32bit AI noflag 6=AI double.
Page 78: Self-Supervision
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Table 24: COM2 serial communication settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Fiber mode 0=No fiber 0=No fiber Fiber mode for COM2 2=Fiber optic Serial mode 1=RS485 2Wire 1=RS485 2Wire Serial mode for COM2 2=RS485 4Wire 3=RS232 no handshake...
Page 79: Internal Faults
A070789 V1 EN Figure 12: Output contact The internal fault code indicates the type of internal relay fault. When a fault appears, the code must be recorded so that it can be reported to ABB customer service. 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 80 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Table 26: Internal fault indications and codes Fault indication Fault code Description Internal Fault An internal system error has occurred. System error Internal Fault A file system error has occurred. File system error Internal Fault Internal fault test activated manually by the Test user.
Page 81: Warnings
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Fault indication Fault code Description Internal Fault Card in slot X100 is faulty. Card error,X100 Internal Fault Card in slot X110 is faulty. Card error,X110 Internal Fault Card in slot X120 is faulty. Card error,X120 Internal Fault Card in slot X130 is faulty.
Page 82 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions If a warning appears, record the name and code so that it can be provided to ABB customer service. Table 27: Warning indications and codes Warning indication Warning code Description Warning An internal system error has occurred.
Page 83: Led Indication Control
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Warning indication Warning code Description Warning Temporary error occurred in RTD card RTD card error,X105 located in slot X105 Warning Temporary error occurred in RTD card RTD card error,X110 located in slot X110 Warning Temporary error occurred in RTD card RTD card error,X130 located in slot X130.
Page 84: Programmable Leds
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions OUT_ST_A /_B /_C and OUT_OPR_A /_B /_C). There is also combined earth fault information collected from all the earth-fault functions available in the relay configuration (available as output signals OUT_ST_NEUT and OUT_OPR_NEUT). Programmable LEDs 3.4.1 Function block GUID-00339108-34E4-496C-9142-5DC69F55EE7A V1 EN...
Page 85 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Each LED has two control inputs, ALARM and OK. The color setting is common for all the LEDs. It is controlled with the Alarm colour setting, the default value being "Red". The OK input corresponds to the color that is available, with the default value being "Green".
Page 86 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions "Follow-S": Follow Signal, ON In this mode ALARM follows the input signal value, Non-latched. Activating signal GUID-952BD571-874A-4572-8710-F0E879678552 V1 EN Figure 18: Operating sequence "Follow-S" "Follow-F": Follow Signal, Flashing Similar to "Follow-S", but instead the LED is flashing when the input is active, Non- latched.
Page 87: Signals
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Activating signal Acknow. GUID-1B1414BD-2535-40FA-9642-8FBA4D19BA4A V1 EN Figure 20: Operating sequence "LatchedAck-F-S" 3.4.3 Signals Table 28: Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0=False Ok input for LED 1 ALARM BOOLEAN 0=False Alarm input for LED 1 RESET BOOLEAN 0=False...
Page 88: Settings
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Name Type Default Description ALARM BOOLEAN 0=False Alarm input for LED 9 RESET BOOLEAN 0=False Reset input for LED 9 BOOLEAN 0=False Ok input for LED 10 ALARM BOOLEAN 0=False Alarm input for LED 10 RESET BOOLEAN 0=False...
Page 89: Monitored Data
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Alarm mode 0=Follow-S 0=Follow-S Alarm mode for programmable LED 6 1=Follow-F 2=Latched-S 3=LatchedAck-F-S Description Programmable Programmable LED description LEDs LED 6 Alarm mode 0=Follow-S 0=Follow-S Alarm mode for programmable LED 7 1=Follow-F 2=Latched-S 3=LatchedAck-F-S...
Page 90: Time Synchronization
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Programmable LED Enum 0=None Status of programmable 1=Ok LED 4 3=Alarm Programmable LED Enum 0=None Status of programmable 1=Ok LED 5 3=Alarm Programmable LED Enum 0=None Status of programmable 1=Ok LED 6 3=Alarm...
Page 91 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions The setting Synch source determines the method to synchronize the real-time clock. If it is set to “None”, the clock is free-running and the settings Date and Time can be used to set the time manually. Other setting values activate a communication protocol that provides the time synchronization.
Page 92: Signals
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions IRIG-B time synchronization requires a COM card with an IRIG-B input. 3.5.1.3 Signals Table 31: GNRLLTMS output signals Name Type Description ALARM BOOLEAN Time synchronization alarm WARNING BOOLEAN Time synchronization warning 3.5.1.4 Settings Table 32: Time settings Parameter Values (Range)
Page 93 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions The active setting group can be changed by a parameter or via binary inputs depending on the mode selected with the Configuration/Setting Group/SG operation mode setting. The default value of all inputs is FALSE, which makes it possible to use only the required number of inputs and leave the rest disconnected.
Page 94: Test Mode
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Table 35: SG operation mode = “Logic mode 2” Input BI_SG_2 BI_SG_3 BI_SG_4 BI_SG_5 BI_SG_6 Active group FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE FALSE TRUE TRUE The setting group 1 can be copied to any other or all groups from HMI (Copy group Test mode 3.7.1 Function blocks...
Page 95: Application Configuration And Test Mode
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Table 36: Test mode Test mode Description Protection BEH_BLK Normal mode Normal operation FALSE IED blocked Protection working as in “Normal mode” but ACT TRUE configuration can be used to block physical outputs to process. Control function commands blocked.
Page 96: Application Configuration And Control Mode
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Behavior data objects under CTRL logical device follow CTRL.LLN0.Mod value. If "On" is selected, behavior data objects follow the mode of the corresponding logical device. 3.7.5 Application configuration and Control mode The physical outputs from commands to process are blocked with “Blocked“ mode. If physical outputs need to be blocked totally, meaning also commands from the binary inputs, the application configuration must be used to block these signals.
Page 97: Signals
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.7.8 Signals Table 39: PROTECTION input signals Name Type Default Description BI_SG_2 BOOLEAN Setting group 2 is active BI_SG_3 BOOLEAN Setting group 3 is active BI_SG_4 BOOLEAN Setting group 4 is active BI_SG_5 BOOLEAN Setting group 5 is active BI_SG_6...
Page 98: Fault Recorder Fltrfrc
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Name Type Description REMOTE BOOLEAN Control remote BOOLEAN Control all BEH_BLK BOOLEAN Logical device LD0 block status BEH_TST BOOLEAN Logical device LD0 test status Fault recorder FLTRFRC 3.8.1 Function block GUID-6BE3D723-0C52-4047-AA41-73D7C828B02B V1 EN Figure 24: Function block 3.8.2 Functionality...
Page 99: Settings
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions The fault-related current, voltage, frequency, angle values, shot pointer and the active setting group number are taken from the moment of the operate event, or from the beginning of the fault if only a start event occurs during the fault. The maximum current value collects the maximum fault currents during the fault.
Page 100: Monitored Data
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.8.4 Monitored data Table 45: FLTRFRC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Fault number INT32 0...999999 Fault record number Time and date Timestamp Fault record time stamp Protection Enum Protection function 0=Unknown 1=PHLPTOC1 2=PHLPTOC2 6=PHHPTOC1...
Page 101 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description 65=LSHDPFRQ 66=LSHDPFRQ 67=LSHDPFRQ 68=LSHDPFRQ 69=LSHDPFRQ 71=DPHLPDOC 72=DPHLPDOC 74=DPHHPDOC 77=MAPGAPC1 78=MAPGAPC2 79=MAPGAPC3 85=MNSPTOC1 86=MNSPTOC2 88=LOFLPTUC1 90=TR2PTDF1 91=LNPLDF1 92=LREFPNDF1 94=MPDIF1 96=HREFPDIF1 100=ROVPTOV 101=ROVPTOV 102=ROVPTOV 104=PHPTOV1 105=PHPTOV2 106=PHPTOV3 108=PHPTUV1 109=PHPTUV2 110=PHPTUV3 112=NSPTOV1 113=NSPTOV2 116=PSPTUV1...
Page 102 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description -25=OEPVPH4 -24=OEPVPH3 -23=OEPVPH2 -22=OEPVPH1 -19=PSPTOV2 -18=PSPTOV1 -15=PREVPTOC -12=PHPTUC2 -11=PHPTUC1 -9=PHIZ1 5=PHLTPTOC1 20=EFLPTOC4 26=EFHPTOC5 27=EFHPTOC6 37=NSPTOC3 38=NSPTOC4 45=T1PTTR2 54=DEFHPDEF 75=DPHHPDOC 89=LOFLPTUC2 103=ROVPTOV 117=PSPTUV2 -13=PHPTUC3 3=PHLPTOC3 10=PHHPTOC5 11=PHHPTOC6 28=EFHPTOC7 29=EFHPTOC8 107=PHPTOV4 111=PHPTUV4 114=NSPTOV3...
Page 103 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description -98=RESCPSCH -57=FDEFLPDE -56=FDEFLPDE -54=FEFLPTOC -53=FDPHLPDO -52=FDPHLPDO -50=FPHLPTOC -47=MAP12GAP -46=MAP12GAP -45=MAP12GAP -44=MAP12GAP -43=MAP12GAP -42=MAP12GAP -41=MAP12GAP -40=MAP12GAP -37=HAEFPTOC -35=WPWDE3 -34=WPWDE2 -33=WPWDE1 52=DEFLPDEF3 84=MAPGAPC8 93=LREFPNDF2 97=HREFPDIF2 -117=XDEFLPD -116=XDEFLPD -115=SDPHLPD -114=SDPHLPD -113=XNSPTOC -112=XNSPTOC -111=XEFIPTOC -110=XEFHPTO...
Page 104 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description -65=VVSPPAM1 -64=PHPVOC1 -63=H3EFPSEF -60=HCUBPTO -59=CUBPTOC1 -72=DOPPDPR1 -69=DUPPDPR1 -61=COLPTOC1 -106=MAPGAPC -105=MAPGAPC -104=MAPGAPC -103=MAPGAPC -76=MAPGAPC1 -75=MAPGAPC1 -62=SRCPTOC1 -74=DOPPDPR3 -73=DOPPDPR2 -70=DUPPDPR2 -58=UZPDIS1 -36=UEXPDIS1 14=MFADPSDE -10=LVRTPTUV -8=LVRTPTUV2 -6=LVRTPTUV3 -122=DPH3LPD -121=DPH3HPD -120=DPH3HPD -119=PH3LPTO -118=PH3LPTO -79=PH3HPTOC -78=PH3HPTOC...
Page 105 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Operate time FLOAT32 0.000...999999.9 Operate time Breaker clear time FLOAT32 0.000...3.000 Breaker clear time Fault distance FLOAT32 0.00...3000.00 Distance to fault measured in pu Fault resistance FLOAT32 0.00...1000000.0 Fault resistance Active group INT32...
Page 106 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Current Io-Calc FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 Calculated residual current Current Ps-Seq FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 Positive sequence current Current Ng-Seq FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 Negative sequence current Max current IL1B FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 Maximum phase A current (b) Max current IL2B FLOAT32...
Page 107 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Voltage U12 FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 Phase A to phase B voltage Voltage U23 FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 Phase B to phase C voltage Voltage U31 FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 Phase C to phase A voltage Voltage Uo FLOAT32...
Page 108: Non-Volatile Memory
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Angle UoB - IoB FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Angle residual voltage - residual current (b) Angle U23B - IL1B FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Angle phase B to phase C voltage - phase A current Angle U31B - IL2B FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00...
Page 109 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Rogowski sensor setting example In this example, an 80 A/0.150 V at 50 Hz sensor is used and the application has a 150 A nominal current (In). As the Rogowski sensor is linear and does not saturate, the 80 A/0.150 V at 50 Hz sensor also works as a 150 A/0.28125 V at 50 Hz sensor.
Page 110: Binary Inputs
The same applies for the VT connection parameter which is always set to “WYE” type. The division ratio for ABB voltage sensors is most often 10000:1. Thus, the Division ratio parameter is usually set to “10000”. The primary voltage is proportionally divided by this division ratio.
Page 111: Binary Input Inversion
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions GUID-13DA5833-D263-4E23-B666-CF38B1011A4B V1 EN Figure 25: Binary input filtering 3 Input signal 4 Filtered input signal 5 Filter time At the beginning, the input signal is at the high state, the short low state is filtered and no input state change is detected.
Page 112: Oscillation Suppression
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions When a binary input is inverted, the state of the input is TRUE (1) when no control voltage is applied to its terminals. Accordingly, the input state is FALSE (0) when a control voltage is applied to the terminals of the binary input. 3.11.3 Oscillation suppression Oscillation suppression is used to reduce the load from the system when a binary input...
Page 113: Power Output Contacts
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions can also be used to energize an external trip relay, which in turn can be confiugred to energize the breaker trip or close coils. Using an external trip relay can require an external trip circuit supervision relay.
Page 114: Double-Pole Power Outputs Po3 And Po4 With Trip Circuit Supervision
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.12.1.2 Double-pole power outputs PO3 and PO4 with trip circuit supervision The power outputs PO3 and PO4 are double-pole normally open/form A power outputs with trip circuit supervision. When the two poles of the contacts are connected in series, they have the same technical specification as PO1 for breaking duty.
Page 115: Dual Single-Pole High-Speed Power Outputs Hso1, Hso2 And Hso3
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions GUID-968B105C-D7AA-4BFE-9BE8-89EE6DDE789E V2 EN Figure 28: Signal/trip output contact SO3 The signal/trip output contact is included in the module RTD0002 located in slot X130 of the protection relay. 3.12.1.4 Dual single-pole high-speed power outputs HSO1, HSO2 and HSO3 HSO1, HSO2 and HSO3 are dual parallel connected, single-pole, normally open/form A high-speed power outputs.
Page 116: Signal Output Contacts
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions X105 HSO1 HSO2 HSO3 GUID-D63F0E1F-73CD-4CD2-AAD1-6E2510F0A308 V1 EN Figure 29: High-speed power outputs HSO1, HSO2 and HSO3 The reset time of the high-speed output contacts is longer than that of the conventional output contacts. High-speed power contacts are part of the card BIO0007 with eight binary inputs and three HSOs.
Page 117: Internal Fault Signal Output Irf
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.12.2.1 Internal fault signal output IRF The internal fault signal output (change-over/form C) IRF is a single contact included in the power supply module of the protection relay. X100 GUID-C09595E9-3C42-437A-BDB2-B20C35FA0BD2 V1 EN Figure 30: Internal fault signal output IRF 3.12.2.2 Signal outputs SO1 and SO2 in power supply module...
Page 118: Signal Outputs So1 And So2 In Rtd0002
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.12.2.3 Signal outputs SO1 and SO2 in RTD0002 The signal ouputs SO1 and SO2 (single contact/change-over /form C) are included in the RTD0002 module. X130 GUID-DA6EDCF6-596D-4175-A1B6-E1C69C8A2864 V1 EN Figure 32: Signal output in RTD0002 3.12.2.4 Signal outputs SO1, SO2, SO3 and SO4 in BIO0005 The optional card BIO0005 provides the signal outputs SO1, SO2 SO3 and SO4.
Page 119: Rtd/Ma Inputs
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions X110 X110 GUID-CBA9A48A-2549-455B-907D-8261E2259BF4 V1 EN Figure 33: Signal output in BIO0005 3.13 RTD/mA inputs 3.13.1 Functionality The RTD and mA analog input module is used for monitoring and metering current (mA), temperature (°C) and resistance (Ω). Each input can be linearly scaled for various applications, for example, transformer’s tap changer position indication.
Page 120: Selection Of Input Signal Type
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.13.2.1 Selection of input signal type The function module inputs accept current or resistance type signals. The inputs are configured for a particular type of input type by the channel-specific Input mode setting. The default value for all inputs is “Not in use”, which means that the channel is not sampled at all, and the output value quality is set accordingly.
Page 121: Input Linear Scaling
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.13.2.3 Input linear scaling Each RTD/mA input can be scaled linearly by the construction of a linear output function in respect to the input. The curve consists of two points, where the y-axis (Input minimum and Input maximum) defines the input range and the x-axis (Value minimum and Value maximum) is the range of the scaled value of the input.
Page 122: Self-Supervision
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.13.2.5 Self-supervision Each input sample is validated before it is fed into the filter algorithm. The samples are validated by measuring an internally set reference current immediately after the inputs are sampled. Each RTD sensor type has expected current based on the sensor type. If the measured offset current deviates from the reference current more than 20%, the sample is discarded and the output is set to invalid.
Page 123: Deadband Supervision
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions The range information of “High-high limit” and “Low-low limit” is combined from all measurement channels to the Boolean ALARM output. The range information of “High limit” and “Low limit” is combined from all measurement channels to the Boolean WARNING output.
Page 124: Rtd Temperature Vs. Resistance
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions deadband Value maximum Value minimum − ⋅ 100000 ∆ (Equation 3) GUID-CC447162-C1B4-4E74-A253-828F388266EB V2 EN Example of RTD analog input deadband supervision Temperature sensor Pt100 is used in the temperature range of 15...180 °C. Value unit “Degrees Celsius”...
Page 125: Rtd/Ma Input Connection
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Temp Platinum TCR 0.00385 Nickel TCR 0.00618 Copper TCR °C 0.00427 Pt 100 Pt 250 Ni 100 Ni 120 Ni 250 Cu 10 111.67 279.175 117.1 140.52 292.75 115.54 288.85 147.6 307.5 10.58 119.4 298.5 129.1 154.92...
Page 126 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions X110 Resistor sensor RTD1 RTD2 RTD3 GUID-CEF1FA63-A641-4F5E-89A3-E1529307D198 V2 EN Figure 37: Three RTD sensors and two resistance sensors connected according to the 3-wire connection for 6RTD/2mA card X110 Resistor sensor RTD1 RTD2 RTD3 GUID-8DAE1E59-160B-4E90-ABB3-952C84E129D2 V2 EN Figure 38: Three RTD sensors and two resistance sensors connected according to the 2-wire connection for 6RTD/2mA card...
Page 127 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions X110 Sensor Shunt Transducer (44 Ω) GUID-FC23D8FC-E9BF-4B62-B8AA-52B4EDE2FF12 V2 EN Figure 39: mA wiring connection for 6RTD/2mA card 2RTD/1mA card This type of card accepts one milliampere input, two inputs from RTD sensors and five inputs from VTs. The Input 1 is assigned for current measurements, inputs 2 and 3 are for RTD sensors and inputs 4 to 8 are used for measuring input data from VT.
Page 128: Signals
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions X130 Resistor sensor RTD1 RTD2 GUID-F939E7EE-B932-4002-9D27-1CEA7C595E0B V2 EN Figure 41: Two RTD and resistance sensors connected according to the 2-wire connection for RTD/mA card X130 Sensor Shunt Transducer (44 Ω) GUID-FBB50B49-0EFE-4D1C-AB71-204C3E170C1D V2 EN Figure 42: mA wiring connection for RTD/mA card 3.13.3 Signals...
Page 129: Settings
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Name Type Description AI_VAL5 FLOAT32 RTD input, Connectors 9-10-11c, instantaneous value AI_VAL6 FLOAT32 RTD input, Connectors 13-14-12c, instantaneous value AI_VAL7 FLOAT32 RTD input, Connectors 15-16-12c, instantaneous value AI_VAL8 FLOAT32 RTD input, Connectors 17-18-12c, instantaneous value Table 58: 2RTD/1mA analog output signals...
Page 130 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Value low limit -10000.0...10000.0 -10000.0 Output value low warning limit for supervision Value low low limit -10000.0...10000.0 -10000.0 Output value low alarm limit for supervision Value deadband 100...100000 1000 Deadband configuration value for integral...
Page 131: Monitored Data
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.13.5 Monitored data Table 61: 6RTD/2mA monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description AI_DB1 FLOAT32 -10000.0...10000 mA input, Connectors 1-2, reported value AI_RANGE1 Enum 0=normal mA input, Connectors 1=high 1-2, range 2=low 3=high-high 4=low-low AI_DB2 FLOAT32...
Page 132: Smv Function Blocks
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description AI_RANGE7 Enum 0=normal RTD input, Connectors 1=high 15-16-12c, range 2=low 3=high-high 4=low-low AI_DB8 FLOAT32 -10000.0...10000 RTD input, Connectors 17-18-12c, reported value AI_RANGE8 Enum 0=normal RTD input, Connectors 1=high 17-18-12c, range 2=low 3=high-high...
Page 133: Iec 61850-9-2 Le Sampled Values Sending Smvsender
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.14.1 IEC 61850-9-2 LE sampled values sending SMVSENDER 3.14.1.1 Functionality The SMVSENDER function block is used for activating the SMV sending functionality. It adds/removes the sampled value control block and the related data set into/from the sending device's configuration.
Page 134: Ultvtr Function Block
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.14.3 ULTVTR function block 3.14.3.1 Function block GUID-16BA49F4-A98B-40FD-B24A-C2101053E1CA V2 EN Figure 44: Function block 3.14.3.2 Functionality The ULTVTR function is used in the receiver application to perform the supervision for the sampled values and to connect the received analog phase voltage inputs to the application.
Page 135: Signals
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions The WARNING output in the receiver is activated if the synchronization accuracy of the sender or the receiver is worse than 4 μs. The output is held on for 10 seconds after the synchronization accuracy returns within limits. The WARNING output is always internally active whenever the ALARM output is active.
Page 136: Monitored Data
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Voltage input type 1=Voltage trafo 1=Voltage trafo Type of the voltage input 3=CVD sensor Angle Corr A -20.0000...20.0000 0.0001 0.0000 Phase A Voltage phasor angle correction of an external voltage transformer Angle Corr B -20.0000...20.0000 0.0001...
Page 137: Signals
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions ALARM is activated when two or more consecutive SMV frames are lost or late. A single loss of frame is corrected with a zero-order hold scheme. In this case, the effect on protection is considered negligible and the WARNING or ALARM outputs are not activated.
Page 138: Goose Function Blocks
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions • Monitoring/I/O status/Analog inputs • Monitoring/IED status/SMV traffic • Monitoring/IED status/SMV accuracy 3.15 GOOSE function blocks GOOSE function blocks are used for connecting incoming GOOSE data to application. They support BOOLEAN, Dbpos, Enum, FLOAT32, INT8 and INT32 data types.
Page 139: Signals
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.15.1.3 Signals Table 71: GOOSERCV_BIN Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output signal VALID BOOLEAN Output signal 3.15.2 GOOSERCV_DP function block 3.15.2.1 Function block GUID-63C0C3EE-1C0E-4F78-A06E-3E84F457FC98 V1 EN Figure 47: Function block 3.15.2.2 Functionality The GOOSERCV_DP function is used to connect the GOOSE double binary inputs to the application.
Page 140: Functionality
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.15.3.2 Functionality The GOOSERCV_MV function is used to connect the GOOSE measured value inputs to the application. 3.15.3.3 Signals Table 73: GOOSERCV_MV Output signals Name Type Description FLOAT32 Output signal VALID BOOLEAN Output signal 3.15.4 GOOSERCV_INT8 function block 3.15.4.1...
Page 141: Goosercv_Intl Function Block
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.15.5 GOOSERCV_INTL function block 3.15.5.1 Function block GUID-241A36E0-1BB9-4323-989F-39668A7B1DAC V1 EN Figure 50: Function block 3.15.5.2 Functionality The GOOSERCV_INTL function is used to connect the GOOSE double binary input to the application and extracting single binary position signals from the double binary position signal.
Page 142: Goosercv_Cmv Function Block
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.15.6 GOOSERCV_CMV function block 3.15.6.1 Function block GUID-4C3F3A1A-F5D1-42E1-840F-6106C58CB380 V1 EN Figure 51: Function block 3.15.6.2 Functionality The GOOSERCV_CMV function is used to connect GOOSE measured value inputs to the application. The MAG_IN (amplitude) and ANG_IN (angle) inputs are defined in the GOOSE configuration (PCM600).
Page 143: Functionality
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.15.7.2 Functionality The GOOSERCV_ENUM function block is used to connect GOOSE enumerator inputs to the application. 3.15.7.3 Signals Table 77: GOOSERCV_ENUM Output signals Name Type Description Enum Output signal VALID BOOLEAN Output signal 3.15.8 GOOSERCV_INT32 function block 3.15.8.1 Function block...
Page 144: Type Conversion Function Blocks
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.16 Type conversion function blocks 3.16.1 QTY_GOOD function block 3.16.1.1 Function block GUID-1999D6D9-4517-4FFE-A14D-08FDB5E8B9F6 V1 EN Figure 54: Function block 3.16.1.2 Functionality The QTY_GOOD function block evaluates the quality bits of the input signal and passes it as a Boolean signal for the application.
Page 145: Qty_Bad Function Block
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.16.2 QTY_BAD function block 3.16.2.1 Function block GUID-8C120145-91B6-4295-98FB-AE78430EB532 V1 EN Figure 55: Function block 3.16.2.2 Functionality The QTY_BAD function block evaluates the quality bits of the input signal and passes it as a Boolean signal for the application. The IN input can be connected to any logic application signal (logic function output, binary input, application function output or received GOOSE signal).
Page 146: Functionality
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.16.3.2 Functionality The QTY_GOOSE_COMM function block evaluates the peer device communication status from the quality bits of the input signal and passes it as a Boolean signal to the application. The IN input signal must be connected to the VALID signal of the GOOSE function block.
Page 147: Signals
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions GOOSERCV_ENUM function block does not receive the value from the sending device or it is invalid, the default value (0) is used and the ALARM is activated in the T_HEALTH function block. 3.16.4.3 Signals Table 85: T_HEALTH Input signals Name...
Page 148: T_Dir Function Block
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.16.6 T_DIR function block 3.16.6.1 Function block GUID-BD31ED40-3A32-4F65-A697-3E7344730096 V1 EN Figure 59: Function block 3.16.6.2 Functionality The T_DIR function evaluates enumerated data of the FAULT_DIR data attribute of the directional functions. T_DIR can only be used with GOOSE. The DIR input can be connected to the GOOSERCV_ENUM function block, which is receiving the LD0.<function>.Str.dirGeneral or LD0.<function>.Dir.dirGeneral data attribute sent by another device.
Page 149: Functionality
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.16.7.2 Functionality The T_TCMD function is used to convert enumerated input signal to Boolean output signals. Table 91: Conversion from enumerated to Boolean RAISE LOWER FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE 3.16.7.3 Signals Table 92: T_TCMD input signals...
Page 150: Signals
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Table 94: Conversion from integer to Boolean RAISE LOWER FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE 3.16.8.3 Signals Table 95: T_TCMD_BIN input signals Name Type Default Description INT32 Input signal Table 96: T_TCMD_BIN output signals Name Type Description...
Page 151: Signals
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.16.9.3 Signals Table 98: T_BIN_TCMD input signals Name Type Default Description RAISE BOOLEAN Raise command LOWER BOOLEAN Lower command Table 99: T_BIN_TCMD output signals Name Type Description INT32 Output signal 3.17 Configurable logic blocks 3.17.1 Standard configurable logic blocks 3.17.1.1...
Page 152 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions The O output is activated when at least one input has the value TRUE. The default value of all inputs is FALSE, which makes it possible to use only the required number of inputs and leave the rest disconnected. OR has two inputs, OR6 six and OR20 twenty inputs.
Page 153 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN Input signal 18 BOOLEAN Input signal 19 BOOLEAN Input signal 20 Table 103: OR Output signal Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output signal Table 104: OR6 Output signal Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output signal...
Page 154: And Function Block
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.17.1.2 AND function block Function block GUID-F560A373-4DB9-42E9-B687-DF4A3E45359C V1 EN Figure 64: Function blocks Functionality AND, AND6 and AND20 are used to form general combinatory expressions with Boolean variables. The default value in all inputs is logical true, which makes it possible to use only the required number of inputs and leave the rest disconnected.
Page 155 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN Input signal 4 BOOLEAN Input signal 5 BOOLEAN Input signal 6 Table 108: AND20 Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN Input signal 1 BOOLEAN Input signal 2 BOOLEAN Input signal 3 BOOLEAN Input signal 4...
Page 156: Xor Function Block
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Settings The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600. 3.17.1.3 XOR function block Function block GUID-9C247C8A-03A5-4F08-8329-F08BE7125B9A V1 EN Figure 65: Function block Functionality The exclusive OR function XOR is used to generate combinatory expressions with Boolean variables.
Page 157: Max3 Function Block
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Functionality NOT is used to generate combinatory expressions with Boolean variables. NOT inverts the input signal. Signals Table 114: NOT Input signal Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN Input signal Table 115: NOT Output signal Name Type Description...
Page 158: Min3 Function Block
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Table 117: MAX3 Output signal Name Type Description FLOAT32 Output signal Settings The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600. 3.17.1.6 MIN3 function block Function block GUID-40218B77-8A30-445A-977E-46CB8783490D V1 EN Figure 68: Function block Functionality The minimum function MIN3 selects the minimum value from three analog values.
Page 159: R_Trig Function Block
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.17.1.7 R_TRIG function block Function block GUID-3D0BBDC3-4091-4D8B-A35C-95F6289E6FD8 V1 EN Figure 69: Function block Functionality R_TRIG is used as a rising edge detector. R_TRIG detects the transition from FALSE to TRUE at the CLK input. When the rising edge is detected, the element assigns the output to TRUE.
Page 160: T_Pos_Xx Function Blocks
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions The function detects the transition from TRUE to FALSE at the CLK input. When the falling edge is detected, the element assigns the Q output to TRUE. At the next execution round, the output is returned to FALSE despite the state of the input. Signals Table 122: F_TRIG Input signals...
Page 161: Switchr Function Block
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Signals Table 125: T_POS_CL Input signals Name Type Default Description Double binary Input signal Table 126: T_POS_OP Input signals Name Type Default Description Double binary Input signal Table 127: T_POS_OK Input signals Name Type Default Description Double binary...
Page 162: Switchi32 Function Block
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Functionality SWITCHR switching block for REAL data type is operated by the CTL_SW input, selects the output value OUT between the IN1 and IN2 inputs. CTL_SW FALSE TRUE Signals Table 131: SWITCHR Input signals Name Type Default...
Page 163: Sr Function Block
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Signals Table 134: SWITCHI32 input signals Name Type Default Description CTL_SW BOOLEAN Control Switch INT32 Input signal 1 INT32 Input signal 2 Table 135: SWITCHI32 output signals Name Type Description INT32 Output signal 3.17.1.12 SR function block Function block GUID-0B62CAED-F8A4-4738-B546-677DA362FE24 V2 EN...
Page 164: Rs Function Block
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Signals Table 137: SR Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q output when set BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q output when Table 138: SR Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Q status NOTQ BOOLEAN NOTQ status...
Page 165: Minimum Pulse Timer
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Signals Table 140: RS Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q output when set BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q output when Table 141: RS Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Q status NOTQ BOOLEAN NOTQ status...
Page 166 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions GUID-8196EE39-3529-46DC-A161-B1C40224559F V1 EN Figure 77: A = Trip pulse is shorter than Pulse time setting, B = Trip pulse is longer than Pulse time setting Signals Table 143: TPGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0=False...
Page 167: Minimum Pulse Timer Tpsgapc
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.17.2.2 Minimum pulse timer TPSGAPC Function block GUID-F9AACAF7-2183-4315-BE6F-CD53618009C0 V1 EN Figure 78: Function block Functionality The Minimum second pulse timer function TPSGAPC contains two independent timers. The function has a settable pulse length (in seconds). The timers are used for setting the minimum pulse length for example, the signal outputs.
Page 168: Minimum Pulse Timer Tpmgapc
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Technical revision history Table 150: TPSGAPC Technical revision history Technical revision Change Outputs now visible in menu Internal improvement 3.17.2.3 Minimum pulse timer TPMGAPC Function block GUID-AB26B298-F7FA-428F-B498-6605DB5B0661 V1 EN Figure 80: Function block Functionality The Minimum minute pulse timer function TPMGAPC contains two independent timers.
Page 169: Pulse Timer Ptgapc
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Table 152: TPMGAPC Output signals Name Type Description OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 status OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 status Settings Table 153: TPMGAPC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Pulse time 0...300 Minimum pulse time 3.17.3...
Page 170: Signals
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.17.3.3 Signals Table 154: PTGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0=False Input 1 status BOOLEAN 0=False Input 2 status BOOLEAN 0=False Input 3 status BOOLEAN 0=False Input 4 status BOOLEAN 0=False Input 5 status BOOLEAN 0=False Input 6 status...
Page 171: Technical Data
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.17.3.5 Technical data Table 157: PTGAPC Technical data Characteristic Value Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms 3.17.4 Time delay off (8 pcs) TOFGAPC 3.17.4.1 Function block GUID-6BFF6180-042F-4526-BB80-D53B2458F376 V1 EN Figure 84: Function block 3.17.4.2...
Page 172: Signals
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.17.4.3 Signals Table 158: TOFGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0=False Input 1 status BOOLEAN 0=False Input 2 status BOOLEAN 0=False Input 3 status BOOLEAN 0=False Input 4 status BOOLEAN 0=False Input 5 status BOOLEAN 0=False Input 6 status...
Page 173: Technical Data
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.17.4.5 Technical data Table 161: TOFGAPC Technical data Characteristic Value Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms 3.17.5 Time delay on (8 pcs) TONGAPC 3.17.5.1 Function block GUID-B694FC27-E6AB-40FF-B1C7-A7EB608D6866 V1 EN Figure 86: Function block 3.17.5.2...
Page 174: Signals
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.17.5.3 Signals Table 162: TONGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0=False Input 1 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 2 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 3 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 4 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 5 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 6 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 7...
Page 175: Technical Data
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.17.5.5 Technical data Table 165: TONGAPC Technical data Characteristic Value Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms 3.17.6 Set reset (8 pcs) SRGAPC 3.17.6.1 Function block GUID-93136D07-FDC4-4356-95B5-54D3B2FC9B1C V1 EN Figure 88: Function block 3.17.6.2 Functionality...
Page 176: Signals
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.17.6.3 Signals Table 167: SRGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q1 output when set BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q1 output when set BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q2 output when set BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q2 output when set BOOLEAN 0=False...
Page 177: Settings
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.17.6.4 Settings Table 169: SRGAPC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Reset Q1 0=Cancel 0=Cancel Resets Q1 output when set 1=Reset Reset Q2 0=Cancel 0=Cancel Resets Q2 output when set 1=Reset Reset Q3 0=Cancel...
Page 178: Signals
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.17.7.3 Signals Table 170: MVGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0=False IN1 status BOOLEAN 0=False IN2 status BOOLEAN 0=False IN3 status BOOLEAN 0=False IN4 status BOOLEAN 0=False IN5 status BOOLEAN 0=False IN6 status BOOLEAN 0=False IN7 status...
Page 179: Integer Value Move Mvi4Gapc
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.17.8 Integer value move MVI4GAPC 3.17.8.1 Function block MVI4GAPC OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 GUID-9049D1C3-A3FC-4B92-8CDC-9F3D5B916471 V1 EN Figure 90: Function block 3.17.8.2 Functionality The integer value move function MVI4GAPC is used for creation of the events from the integer values.
Page 180: Analog Value Scaling Sca4Gapc
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.17.9 Analog value scaling SCA4GAPC 3.17.9.1 Function block SCA4GAPC AI1_VALUE AO1_VALUE AI2_VALUE AO2_VALUE AI3_VALUE AO3_VALUE AI4_VALUE AO4_VALUE GUID-9D830A50-37F1-4478-B458-9C90742ECA54 V1 EN Figure 91: Function block 3.17.9.2 Functionality The analog value scaling function SCA4GAPC is used for scaling the analog value. It allows creating events from analog values.
Page 181: Signals
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.17.9.3 Signals Table 175: SCA4GAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description AI1_VALUE FLOAT32 Analog input value of channel 1 AI2_VALUE FLOAT32 Analog input value of channel 2 AI3_VALUE FLOAT32 Analog input value of channel 3 AI4_VALUE FLOAT32 Analog input value of channel 4...
Page 182: Functionality
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.17.10.2 Functionality Local/Remote control is by default realized through the R/L button on the front panel. The control via binary input can be enabled by setting the value of the LR control setting to "Binary input". The binary input control requires that the CONTROL function is instantiated in the product configuration.
Page 183: Station Authority Level "L,R
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions the client, and remote IEC 61850 control access must be allowed by the relay station authority. CTRL.LLN0.LocSta data object value is retained in the nonvolatile memory. The present control status can be monitored in the HMI or PCM600 via Monitoring/Control command with the LR state parameter or from the IEC 61850 data object CTRL.LLN0.
Page 184: Station Authority Level "L,R,L+R
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Table 180: Station authority “L,R” using CONTROL function block L/R control L/R control status Control access Control FB input CTRL.LLN0.LocSta CTRL.LLN0.MltLev L/R state Local user IEC 61850 client CTRL.LLN0.LocKeyHMI CTRL_OFF FALSE CTRL_LOC FALSE CTRL_STA FALSE CTRL_REM FALSE...
Page 185: Station Authority Level "L,S,R
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Table 182: Station authority “L,R,L+R” using CONTROL function block L/R Control L/R Control status Control access Control FB input CTRL.LLN0.LocSta CTRL.LLN0.MltLev L/R state Local user IEC 61850 client CTRL.LLN0.LocKeyHMI CTRL_OFF FALSE CTRL_LOC FALSE CTRL_STA FALSE CTRL_REM FALSE...
Page 186: Station Authority Level "L,S,S+R,L+S,L+S+R
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Table 183: Station authority level “L,S,R” using R/L button L/R Control L/R Control status Control access R/L button CTRL.LLN0.MltLev L/R state Local user IEC 61850 IEC 61850 CTRL.LLN0.LocSta CTRL.LLN0.LocKeyHMI client client Local FALSE FALSE Remote FALSE FALSE...
Page 187 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions LOCAL STATION L+S+R IEC 61850 IEC 61850 IEC 61850 IEC 61850 IEC 61850 IEC 61850 remote remote remote remote remote remote IEC 61850 IEC 61850 IEC 61850 IEC 61850 IEC 61850 IEC 61850 station station station station...
Page 188: Signals
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions L/R Control L/R Control status Control access Control FB input CTRL.LLN0.LocSta CTRL.LLN0.MltLev L/R state Local user IEC 61850 IEC 61850 CTRL.LLN0.LocKeyHMI client client TRUE TRUE CTRL_REM CTRL_REM FALSE TRUE CTRL_ALL FALSE TRUE TRUE TRUE CTRL_ALL 1) Station client reserves the control operating by writing controllable point LocSta.
Page 189: Settings
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.17.10.9 Settings Table 189: Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description LR control 1=LR key 1=LR key LR control through LR key or binary input 2=Binary input Station authority 1=L,R 1=L,R Control command originator category 2=L,S,R usage...
Page 190: Monitored Data
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.17.10.10 Monitored data Table 190: Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Command response Enum 0=No commands Latest command 1=Select open response 2=Select close 3=Operate open 4=Operate close 5=Direct open 6=Direct close 7=Cancel 8=Position reached 9=Position...
Page 191: Generic Control Point (16 Pcs) Spcgapc
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.17.11 Generic control point (16 pcs) SPCGAPC 3.17.11.1 Function block GUID-3A7D9472-39BF-4522-83CA-89BFBA1800E6 V1 EN Figure 97: Function block 3.17.11.2 Functionality The generic control point (16 pcs) function SPCGAPC can be used in combination with other function blocks such as FKEYGGIO. SPCGAPC offers the capability to activate its outputs through a local or remote control.
Page 192: Signals
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.17.11.3 Signals Table 191: SPCGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 1 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 2 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point 3...
Page 193: Settings
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.17.11.4 Settings Table 193: SPCGAPC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Loc Rem restriction 0=False 1=True Local remote switch restriction 1=True Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point 1=Toggle/ Persistent -1=Off...
Page 194 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Pulse length 10...3600000 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCGAPC1 Generic control point description Output 7 Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point 1=Toggle/ Persistent -1=Off...
Page 195: Remote Generic Control Points Spcrgapc
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Description SPCGAPC1 Generic control point description Output 14 Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point 1=Toggle/ Persistent -1=Off Pulse length 10...3600000 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCGAPC1 Generic control point description...
Page 196: Signals
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions SPCRGAPC has the Operation mode, Pulse length and Description settings available to control all 16 outputs. By default, the Operation mode setting is set to "Off". This disables the controllable signal output. SPCRGAPC also has a general setting Loc Rem restriction, which enables or disables the local or remote state functionality.
Page 197: Settings
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output 9 status BOOLEAN Output 10 status BOOLEAN Output 11 status BOOLEAN Output 12 status BOOLEAN Output 13 status BOOLEAN Output 14 status BOOLEAN Output 15 status BOOLEAN Output 16 status 3.17.12.5 Settings Table 196:...
Page 198 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point 1=Persistent -1=Off Pulse length 10...3600000 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCRGAPC1 Generic control point description Output 6 Operation mode 0=Pulsed...
Page 199: Local Generic Control Points Spclgapc
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point 1=Persistent -1=Off Pulse length 10...3600000 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCRGAPC1 Generic control point description Output 14 Operation mode 0=Pulsed...
Page 200: Operation Principle
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.17.13.3 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". SPCLGAPC has the Operation mode, Pulse length and Description settings available to control all 16 outputs. By default, the Operation mode setting is set to "Off". This disables the controllable signal output.
Page 201: Settings
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output 6 status BOOLEAN Output 7 status BOOLEAN Output 8 status BOOLEAN Output 9 status BOOLEAN Output 10 status BOOLEAN Output 11 status BOOLEAN Output 12 status BOOLEAN Output 13 status BOOLEAN Output 14 status BOOLEAN...
Page 202 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Pulse length 10...3600000 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCLGAPC1 Generic control point description Output 5 Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point 1=Persistent -1=Off Pulse length...
Page 203: Programmable Buttons Fkeyggio
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Description SPCLGAPC1 Generic control point description Output 13 Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point 1=Persistent -1=Off Pulse length 10...3600000 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCLGAPC1 Generic control point description...
Page 204: Operation Principle
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions configured by connection with other application functions. This gives the maximum flexibility. 3.17.14.3 Operation principle Inputs L1..L16 represent the LEDs on the protection relay's LHMI. When an input is set to TRUE, the corresponding LED is lit. When a function key on LHMI is pressed, the corresponding output K1..K16 is set to TRUE.
Page 205: Generic Up-Down Counter Udfcnt
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Name Type Description BOOLEAN KEY 10 BOOLEAN KEY 11 BOOLEAN KEY 12 BOOLEAN KEY 13 BOOLEAN KEY 14 BOOLEAN KEY 15 BOOLEAN KEY 16 3.17.15 Generic up-down counter UDFCNT 3.17.15.1 Function block GUID-8BDF76AC-C4AE-43F1-98DF-B4942A21C45E V1 EN Figure 102: Function block 3.17.15.2...
Page 206: Application
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions GUID-9D9880AB-4CA7-4DD5-BA0C-C1D958FC04F6 V1 EN Figure 103: Functional module diagram Up-down counter Each rising edge of the UP_CNT input increments the counter value CNT_VAL by one and each rising edge of the DOWN_CNT input decrements the CNT_VAL by one. If there is a rising edge at both the inputs UP_CNT and DOWN_CNT, the counter value CNT_VAL is unchanged.
Page 207: Signals
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions • Input 1 filter time is set to “5...15 ms” via Configuration/I/O modules/ X110(BIO)/Input filtering • Input osc. level is set to “45...50 events/s” via Configuration/I/O modules/ Common settings • Input osc. hyst is set to “2 events/s” via Configuration/I/O modules/Common settings 3.17.15.5 Signals...
Page 208: Factory Settings Restoration
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.18 Factory settings restoration In case of configuration data loss or any other file system error that prevents the protection relay from working properly, the whole file system can be restored to the original factory state. All default settings and configuration files stored in the factory are restored.
Page 209: Length Of Record
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Disabled Quantity not selected Phase-to-phase 12 voltage Phase-to-phase 23 voltage Phase-to-phase 31 voltage Phase-to-earth 1 voltage Phase-to-earth 2 voltage Phase-to-earth 3 voltage UL1B Phase-to-earth 1 voltage, B side UL2B Phase-to-earth 2 voltage, B side UL3B Phase-to-earth 3 voltage, B side Apparent power...
Page 210: Uploading Of Record
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Demand interval 20.7 41.4 62.0 124.1 248.1 744.3 19.0 37.9 56.9 113.7 227.4 682.3 17.5 35.0 52.5 105.0 209.9 629.8 16.2 32.5 48.7 97.5 194.9 584.8 3.19.2.3 Uploading of record The protection relay stores the load profile COMTRADE files to the C:\LDP \COMTRADE folder.
Page 211: Clearing Of Record
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.19.2.4 Clearing of record The load profile record can be cleared with Reset load profile rec via HMI, communication or the ACT input in PCM600. Clearing of the record is allowed only on the engineer and administrator authorization levels. The load profile record is automatically cleared if the quantity selection parameters are changed or any other parameter which affects the content of the COMTRADE configuration file is changed.
Page 212: Settings
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.19.5 Settings 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 213 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Table 209: LDPRLRC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On 5=off Quantity Sel 1 0=Disabled 0=Disabled Select quantity to be recorded 1=IL1 2=IL2 3=IL3 4=Io 5=IL1B...
Page 214 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Quantity Sel 2 0=Disabled 0=Disabled Select quantity to be recorded 1=IL1 2=IL2 3=IL3 4=Io 5=IL1B 6=IL2B 7=IL3B 8=IoB 9=U12 10=U23 11=U31 12=UL1 13=UL2 14=UL3 15=U12B 16=U23B 17=U31B 18=UL1B 19=UL2B 20=UL3B...
Page 215 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Quantity Sel 3 0=Disabled 0=Disabled Select quantity to be recorded 1=IL1 2=IL2 3=IL3 4=Io 5=IL1B 6=IL2B 7=IL3B 8=IoB 9=U12 10=U23 11=U31 12=UL1 13=UL2 14=UL3 15=U12B 16=U23B 17=U31B 18=UL1B 19=UL2B 20=UL3B...
Page 216 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Quantity Sel 4 0=Disabled 0=Disabled Select quantity to be recorded 1=IL1 2=IL2 3=IL3 4=Io 5=IL1B 6=IL2B 7=IL3B 8=IoB 9=U12 10=U23 11=U31 12=UL1 13=UL2 14=UL3 15=U12B 16=U23B 17=U31B 18=UL1B 19=UL2B 20=UL3B...
Page 217 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Quantity Sel 5 0=Disabled 0=Disabled Select quantity to be recorded 1=IL1 2=IL2 3=IL3 4=Io 5=IL1B 6=IL2B 7=IL3B 8=IoB 9=U12 10=U23 11=U31 12=UL1 13=UL2 14=UL3 15=U12B 16=U23B 17=U31B 18=UL1B 19=UL2B 20=UL3B...
Page 218 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Quantity Sel 6 0=Disabled 0=Disabled Select quantity to be recorded 1=IL1 2=IL2 3=IL3 4=Io 5=IL1B 6=IL2B 7=IL3B 8=IoB 9=U12 10=U23 11=U31 12=UL1 13=UL2 14=UL3 15=U12B 16=U23B 17=U31B 18=UL1B 19=UL2B 20=UL3B...
Page 219 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Quantity Sel 7 0=Disabled 0=Disabled Select quantity to be recorded 1=IL1 2=IL2 3=IL3 4=Io 5=IL1B 6=IL2B 7=IL3B 8=IoB 9=U12 10=U23 11=U31 12=UL1 13=UL2 14=UL3 15=U12B 16=U23B 17=U31B 18=UL1B 19=UL2B 20=UL3B...
Page 220 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Quantity Sel 8 0=Disabled 0=Disabled Select quantity to be recorded 1=IL1 2=IL2 3=IL3 4=Io 5=IL1B 6=IL2B 7=IL3B 8=IoB 9=U12 10=U23 11=U31 12=UL1 13=UL2 14=UL3 15=U12B 16=U23B 17=U31B 18=UL1B 19=UL2B 20=UL3B...
Page 221 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Quantity Sel 9 0=Disabled 0=Disabled Select quantity to be recorded 1=IL1 2=IL2 3=IL3 4=Io 5=IL1B 6=IL2B 7=IL3B 8=IoB 9=U12 10=U23 11=U31 12=UL1 13=UL2 14=UL3 15=U12B 16=U23B 17=U31B 18=UL1B 19=UL2B 20=UL3B...
Page 222 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Quantity Sel 10 0=Disabled 0=Disabled Select quantity to be recorded 1=IL1 2=IL2 3=IL3 4=Io 5=IL1B 6=IL2B 7=IL3B 8=IoB 9=U12 10=U23 11=U31 12=UL1 13=UL2 14=UL3 15=U12B 16=U23B 17=U31B 18=UL1B 19=UL2B 20=UL3B...
Page 223 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Quantity Sel 11 0=Disabled 0=Disabled Select quantity to be recorded 1=IL1 2=IL2 3=IL3 4=Io 5=IL1B 6=IL2B 7=IL3B 8=IoB 9=U12 10=U23 11=U31 12=UL1 13=UL2 14=UL3 15=U12B 16=U23B 17=U31B 18=UL1B 19=UL2B 20=UL3B...
Page 224 Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Quantity Sel 12 0=Disabled 0=Disabled Select quantity to be recorded 1=IL1 2=IL2 3=IL3 4=Io 5=IL1B 6=IL2B 7=IL3B 8=IoB 9=U12 10=U23 11=U31 12=UL1 13=UL2 14=UL3 15=U12B 16=U23B 17=U31B 18=UL1B 19=UL2B 20=UL3B...
Page 225: Monitored Data
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.19.6 Monitored data Table 210: LDPRLRC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Rec. memory used INT32 0...100 How much recording memory is currently used 3.20 ETHERNET channel supervision function blocks 3.20.1 Redundant Ethernet channel supervision RCHLCCH 3.20.1.1 Function block GUID-CD9E923F-7B50-45C0-AE3E-39F576E01906 V1 EN...
Page 226: Settings
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.20.1.4 Settings Table 212: Redundancy settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Redundant None None Mode selection for Ethernet switch on mode redundant communication modules. The "None" mode is used with normal and Self-healing Ethernet topologies. 3.20.1.5 Monitored data Monitored data is available in four locations.
Page 227: Signals
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.20.2.3 Signals Table 213: SCHLCCH1 output signals Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description CH1LIV True Status of Ethernet channel X1/LAN. False Value is "True" if the port is receiving Ethernet frames. Valid only when Redundant mode is set to "None"...
Page 228: Settings
Section 3 1MRS757644 F Basic functions 3.20.2.4 Settings Table 216: Port mode settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Port 1 Mode Mode selection for rear port(s). If port is not used, it can be set to “Off”. Port cannot be set to “Off”...
Page 229: Section 4 Protection Functions
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Section 4 Protection functions Three-phase current protection 4.1.1 Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection PHxPTOC 4.1.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Three-phase non-directional PHLPTOC 3I> 51P-1 overcurrent protection, low stage Three-phase non-directional PHHPTOC 3I>>...
Page 230: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions In the DT mode, the function operates after a predefined operate time and resets when the fault current disappears. The IDMT mode provides current-dependent timer characteristics. The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs, timers or the function itself, if desired.
Page 231 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions A070554 V1 EN Figure 110: Start value behavior with ENA_MULT input activated Phase selection logic If the fault criteria are fulfilled in the level detector, the phase selection logic detects the phase or phases in which the measured current exceeds the setting. If the phase information matches the Num of start phases setting, the phase selection logic activates the timer module.
Page 232: Measurement Modes
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions reset curve type "Def time reset", the reset time depends on the Reset delay time setting. With the reset curve type "Inverse reset", the reset time depends on the current during the drop-off situation. The START output is deactivated when the reset timer has elapsed.
Page 233: Timer Characteristics
IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the special characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. In addition to this, a user programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are applicable.
Page 234: Application
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Operating curve type PHLPTOC PHHPTOC (13) IEC Short Time Inverse (14) IEC Long Time Inverse (15) IEC Definite Time (17) User programmable (18) RI type (19) RD type PHIPTOC supports only definite time characteristic. For a detailed description of timers, see the General function block features...
Page 235 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions clearing two and three-phase short circuits. Therefore, the user can choose how many phases, at minimum, must have currents above the start level for the function to operate. When the number of start-phase settings is set to "1 out of 3", the operation of PHxPTOC is enabled with the presence of high current in one-phase.
Page 236 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The overcurrent and contact based circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF is used to confirm the protection scheme in case of circuit breaker malfunction. A070978 V1 EN Figure 111: Example of traditional time selective transformer overcurrent protection The operating times of the main and backup overcurrent protection of the above scheme become quite long, this applies especially in the busbar faults and also in the...
Page 237 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions protection of transformer LV terminals and short lines. The functionality and performance of the proposed overcurrent protections can be summarized as seen in the table. Table 220: Proposed functionality of numerical transformer and busbar overcurrent protection. DT = definite time, IDMT = inverse definite minimum time O/C-stage Operating char.
Page 238 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The operating times of the time selective stages are very short, because the grading margins between successive protection stages can be kept short. This is mainly due to the advanced measuring principle allowing a certain degree of CT saturation, good operating accuracy and short retardation times of the numerical units.
Page 239 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions A070982 V1 EN Figure 113: Functionality of numerical multiple-stage overcurrent protection The coordination plan is an effective tool to study the operation of time selective operation characteristics. All the points mentioned earlier, required to define the overcurrent protection parameters, can be expressed simultaneously in a coordination plan.
Page 240: Signals
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions A070984 V2 EN Figure 114: Example coordination of numerical multiple-stage overcurrent protection 4.1.1.8 Signals Table 221: PHLPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False...
Page 241 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 223: PHIPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for current multiplier Table 224: PHLPTOC Output signals...
Page 242: Settings
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.1.1.9 Settings Table 227: PHLPTOC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 0.05...5.00 0.01 0.05 Start value Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00...
Page 243 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 230: PHLPTOC Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Minimum operate time 20...60000 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves Reset delay time 0...60000 Reset delay time Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode 2=DFT...
Page 244: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 234: PHHPTOC Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Minimum operate time 20...60000 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves Reset delay time 0...60000 Reset delay time Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode 2=DFT...
Page 245: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 239: PHHPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / operate time PHHPTOC Enum 1=on Status 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off Table 240: PHIPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range)
Page 246: Technical Revision History
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Characteristic Value Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms Suppression of harmonics RMS: No suppression DFT: -50 dB at f = n ×...
Page 247: Three-Independent-Phase Non-Directional Overcurrent Protection Ph3Xptoc
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.1.2 Three-independent-phase non-directional overcurrent protection PH3xPTOC 4.1.2.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Three-independent-phase non- PH3LPTOC 3I_3> 51P-1_3 directional overcurrent protection, low stage Three-independent-phase non- PH3HPTOC 3I_3>> 51P-2_3 directional overcurrent protection, high stage...
Page 248: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.1.2.4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". PH3xPTOC is used as single-phase and three-phase non-directional overcurrent and short circuit protection. The phase operation mode is selected with the Operation curve type setting.
Page 249 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The IED does not accept the Start value or Start value Mult setting if the product of these settings exceeds the Start value setting range. The start value multiplication is normally done when the inrush detection function (INRPHAR) is connected to the ENA_MULT input.
Page 250 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-BCAA40B6-AFC8-439D-BFC6-754280F0000E-CN V1 EN Figure 118: Logic diagram for phase selection module When the Number of start phases setting is set to "1 out of 3" and the fault is in one or several phases, the phase selection logic sends an enabling signal to the faulty phase timers.
Page 251 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate delay time in the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the OPERATE output is activated. When the programmable IDMT curve is selected, the operating time characteristics are defined with the parameters Curve parameter A, Curve parameter B, Curve parameter C, Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E.
Page 252: Timer Characteristics
IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the special characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. In addition, a programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are applicable. The DT characteristic can be chosen by selecting the Operating curve type values "ANSI Def.
Page 253: Application
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Operating curve type Supported by PH3LPTOC PH3HPTOC (13) IEC Short Time Inverse (14) IEC Long Time Inverse (17) Programmable PH3IPTOC supports only definite time characteristic. A detailed description of the timers can be found in the General function block features section in this manual.
Page 254 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions clearing two-phase and three-phase short circuits. Therefore, it can be chosen how many phases, at minimum, must have currents above the start level for the function to operate. Many applications require several steps using different current start levels and time delays.
Page 255 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions PH3LPTOC PH3LPTOC PH3HPTOC PH3HPTOC INRPHAR INRPHAR PH3LPTOC PH3LPTOC PH3HPTOC PH3HPTOC CCBRBRF CCBRBRF INRPHAR INRPHAR MEASUREMENT MEASUREMENT INCOMING INCOMING PH3LPTOC PH3HPTOC CCBRBRF GUID-46F45186-75AC-4487-886A-AA8369F6EF9F V1 EN Figure 119: Example of traditional time-selective transformer overcurrent protection The operating times of the main and backup overcurrent protection of the above scheme become quite long.
Page 256 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 247: Proposed functionality of numerical transformer and busbar overcurrent protection. DT = definite time, IDMT = inverse definite minimum time O/C-stage Operating char. Selectivity mode Operation speed Sensitivity HV/3I> DT/IDMT time selective very high HV/3I>>...
Page 257 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The operating times of the time-selective stages are very short, because the grading margins between successive protection stages can be kept short. This is mainly due to the advanced measuring principle allowing a certain degree of CT saturation, good operating accuracy and short retardation times of the numerical units.
Page 258 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions PH3LPTOC PH3HPTOC PH3IPTOC CCBRBRF INRPHAR OUTGOING OUTGOING INCOMING PH3LPTOC PH3HPTOC PH3IPTOC CCBRBRF INRPHAR Line type 2 Line type 1 GUID-0A032F35-2E27-4AAE-B698-D33E1893B3EA V1 EN Figure 121: Functionality of numerical multiple-stage overcurrent protection The coordination plan is an effective tool to study the operation of time-selective operation characteristics.
Page 259: Signals
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions A070984 V2 EN Figure 122: Example coordination of numerical multiple-stage overcurrent protection 4.1.2.7 Signals Table 248: PH3LPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False...
Page 260 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 251: PH3LPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate OPR_A BOOLEAN Operate phase A OPR_B BOOLEAN Operate phase B OPR_C BOOLEAN Operate phase C START BOOLEAN Start ST_A BOOLEAN Start phase A ST_B BOOLEAN Start phase B...
Page 261: Settings
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.1.2.8 Settings Table 254: PH3LPTOC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 0.05...5.00 0.01 0.05 Start value Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00...
Page 262 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 257: PH3LPTOC Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Minimum operate time 20...60000 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves Reset delay time 0...60000 Reset delay time Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode 2=DFT...
Page 263: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 261: PH3HPTOC Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Minimum operate time 20...60000 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves Reset delay time 0...60000 Reset delay time Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode 2=DFT...
Page 264: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 266: PH3HPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / operate time PH3HPTOC Enum 1=on Status 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off Table 267: PH3IPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range)
Page 265: Three-Phase Directional Overcurrent Protection Dphxpdoc
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Characteristic Value Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms Suppression of harmonics RMS: No suppression DFT: -50 dB at f = n ×...
Page 266: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions In the DT mode, the function operates after a predefined operate time and resets when the fault current disappears. The IDMT mode provides current-dependent timer characteristics. The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs, timers or the function itself, if desired.
Page 267 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 269: Polarizing quantities Polarizing quantity Description Pos. seq. volt Positive sequence voltage Neg. seq. volt Negative sequence voltage Self pol Self polarization Cross pol Cross polarization The directional operation can be selected with the Directional mode setting. The user can select either "Non-directional", "Forward"...
Page 268 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The value for the Min operate voltage setting should be carefully selected since the accuracy in low signal levels is strongly affected by the measuring device accuracy. When the voltage falls below Min operate voltage at a close fault, the fictive voltage is used to determine the phase angle.
Page 269 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Level detector The measured phase currents are compared phasewise to the set Start value. If the measured value exceeds the set Start value, the level detector reports the exceeding of the value to the phase selection logic. If the ENA_MULT input is active, the Start value setting is multiplied by the Start value Mult setting.
Page 270 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate delay time in the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the OPERATE output is activated. When the user-programmable IDMT curve is selected, the operation time characteristics are defined by the parameters Curve parameter A, Curve parameter B, Curve parameter C, Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E.
Page 271: Measurement Modes
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers" mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value, but the OPERATE output is not deactivated when blocking is activated. In the "Block all" mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset.
Page 272 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-CD0B7D5A-1F1A-47E6-AF2A-F6F898645640 V2 EN Figure 127: Configurable operating sectors Table 271: Momentary per phase direction value for monitored data view Criterion for per phase direction information The value for DIR_A/_B/_C The ANGLE_X is not in any of the defined sectors, 0 = unknown or the direction cannot be defined due too low amplitude...
Page 273 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions FAULT_DIR gives the detected direction of the fault during fault situations, that is, when the START output is active. Self-polarizing as polarizing method Table 273: Equations for calculating angle difference for self-polarizing method Faulted Used fault Used Angle difference...
Page 274 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions In an example case of a two-phase short-circuit failure where the fault is between phases B and C, the angle difference is measured between the polarizing quantity U and operating quantity I in the self-polarizing method. GUID-65CFEC0E-0367-44FB-A116-057DD29FEB79 V1 EN Figure 129: Two-phase short circuit, short circuit is between phases B and C...
Page 275 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions faulted phase is phase A. The polarizing quantity is rotated with 90 degrees. The characteristic angle is assumed to be ~ 0 degrees. GUID-6C7D1317-89C4-44BE-A1EB-69BC75863474 V1 EN Figure 130: Single-phase earth fault, phase A In an example of the phasors in a two-phase short-circuit failure where the fault is between the phases B and C, the angle difference is measured between the polarizing quantity U and operating quantity I...
Page 276 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-C2EC2EF1-8A84-4A32-818C-6D7620EA9969 V1 EN Figure 131: Two-phase short circuit, short circuit is between phases B and C The equations are valid when network rotating direction is counter- clockwise, that is, ABC. If the network rotating direction is reversed, 180 degrees is added to the calculated angle difference.
Page 277 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions This means that the actuating polarizing quantity is -U GUID-027DD4B9-5844-4C46-BA9C-54784F2300D3 V2 EN Figure 132: Phasors in a single-phase earth fault, phases A-N, and two-phase short circuit, phases B and C, when the actuating polarizing quantity is the negative-sequence voltage -U2 Positive sequence voltage as polarizing quantity Table 275:...
Page 278 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions -90° GUID-1937EA60-4285-44A7-8A7D-52D7B66FC5A6 V3 EN Figure 133: Phasors in a single-phase earth fault, phase A to ground, and a two- phase short circuit, phases B-C, are short-circuited when the polarizing quantity is the positive-sequence voltage U Network rotation direction Typically, the network rotating direction is counter-clockwise and defined as "ABC".
Page 279: Application
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions NETWORK ROTATION ABC NETWORK ROTATION ACB GUID-BF32C1D4-ECB5-4E96-A27A-05C637D32C86 V2 EN Figure 134: Examples of network rotating direction 4.1.3.7 Application DPHxPDOC is used as short-circuit protection in three-phase distribution or sub transmission networks operating at 50 or 60 Hz. In radial networks, phase overcurrent protection relays are often sufficient for the short circuit protection of lines, transformers and other equipment.
Page 280 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions a risk that the fault situation in one part of the feeding system can de-energize the whole system connected to the LV side. GUID-1A2BD0AD-B217-46F4-A6B4-6FC6E6256EB3 V2 EN Figure 135: Overcurrent protection of parallel lines using directional protection relays DPHxPDOC can be used for parallel operating transformer applications.
Page 281: Signals
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions direction of the directional functionality. The double arrows define the non- directional functionality where faults can be detected in both directions. GUID-276A9D62-BD74-4335-8F20-EC1731B58889 V1 EN Figure 137: Closed ring network topology where feeding lines are protected with directional overcurrent protection relays 4.1.3.8 Signals...
Page 282: Settings
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for current multiplier NON_DIR BOOLEAN 0=False Forces protection to non-directional Table 277: DPHHPDOC Input signals Name Type Default...
Page 283 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operate delay time 40...200000 Operate delay time Operating curve type 1=ANSI Ext. inv. 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type 2=ANSI Very inv. 3=ANSI Norm. inv. 4=ANSI Mod.
Page 284 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Curve parameter B 0.0000...0.7120 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable curve Curve parameter C 0.02...2.00 2.00 Parameter C for customer programmable curve Curve parameter D 0.46...30.00 29.10 Parameter D for customer programmable curve Curve parameter E...
Page 285 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 285: DPHHPDOC Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type 2=Def time reset 3=Inverse reset Voltage Mem time 0...3000 Voltage memory time Pol quantity 1=Self pol 5=Cross pol...
Page 286: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.1.3.10 Monitored data Table 288: DPHLPDOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / operate time FAULT_DIR Enum 0=unknown Detected fault direction 1=forward 2=backward 3=both DIRECTION Enum 0=unknown Direction information...
Page 287: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description DIR_A Enum 0=unknown Direction phase A 1=forward 2=backward -1=both DIR_B Enum 0=unknown Direction phase B 1=forward 2=backward -1=both DIR_C Enum 0=unknown Direction phase C 1=forward 2=backward -1=both ANGLE_A FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Calculated angle...
Page 288: Technical Revision History
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Characteristic Value Retardation time <35 ms Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n ×...
Page 289: Function Block
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.1.4.2 Function block GUID-22B2621B-5B78-4C71-97F8-4BD477A50D51 V1 EN Figure 138: Function block 4.1.4.3 Functionality Directional three-independent-phase directional overcurrent protection function DPH3xPDOC is used as one-phase, two-phase or three-phase directional overcurrent and short circuit protection for feeders. DPH3xPDOC starts when the value of the current exceeds the set limit and directional criterion is fulfilled.
Page 290 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-347973B8-AB04-40ED-B985-3F36A6305066 V1 EN Figure 139: Functional module diagram Directional calculation The directional calculation compares the current phasors to the polarizing phasor. A suitable polarization quantity can be selected from the different polarization quantities, which are the positive-sequence voltage, negative-sequence voltage, self- polarizing (faulted) voltage and cross-polarizing voltages (healthy voltages).
Page 291 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The Characteristic angle setting is used to turn the directional characteristic. The value of Characteristic angle should be chosen in such a way that all the faults in the operating direction are seen in the operating zone and all the faults in the opposite direction are seen in the non-operating zone.
Page 292 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions DPH3xPDOC can be forced to non-directional operation with the NON_DIR input. When the NON_DIR input is active, DPH3xPDOC operates as a non-directional overcurrent protection regardless of the Directional mode setting. GUID-718D61B4-DAD0-4F43-8108-86F7B44E7E2D V1 EN Figure 140: Operating zones at minimum magnitude levels Level detector The measured phase currents are compared to the set Start value.
Page 293 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions A070554 V1 EN Figure 141: Start value behavior with the ENA_MULT input activated Phase selection logic The phase selection logic detects the faulty phase or phases and controls the timers according to the set value of the Num of start phases setting. 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 294 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-55DB779A-4F3D-4E2D-AF39-E1F2F5ED9CAA V1 EN Figure 142: Logic diagram for phase selection module When the Number of start phase setting is set to "1 out of 3" and the fault is in one or several phases, the phase selection logic sends an enabling signal to the faulty phase timers.
Page 295 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Each phase has its own phase-specific starting and operating outputs: ST_A, ST_B, ST_C, OPR_A, OPR_B and OPR_C. Once activated, each timer activates its START output. Depending on the value of the Operating curve type setting, the time characteristics are according to DT or IDMT. When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate delay time in the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the OPERATE output is activated.
Page 296: Timer Characteristics
IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the special characteristics of the ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. In addition to this, a programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are applicable. The DT characteristic can be chosen by selecting the Operating curve type values "ANSI...
Page 297: Directional Overcurrent Characteristics
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Curve name Supported by DPH3LPDOC DPH3HPDOC (9) IEC Normal Inverse (10) IEC Very Inverse (11) IEC Inverse (12) IEC Extremely Inverse (13) IEC Short Time Inverse (14) IEC Long Time Inverse (17) Programmable A detailed description of the timers can be found in the General function block features section in this manual.
Page 298 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-CD0B7D5A-1F1A-47E6-AF2A-F6F898645640 V2 EN Figure 143: Configurable operating sectors Table 295: Momentary per phase direction value for monitored data view Criterion for per phase direction information The value for DIR_A/_B/_C The ANGLE_X is not in any of the defined sectors, 0 = unknown or the direction cannot be defined due to low amplitude...
Page 299 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions FAULT_DIR gives the detected direction of the fault during fault situations, that is, when the START output is active. Self-polarizing as polarizing method Table 297: Equations for calculating angle difference for self-polarizing method Faulted Used fault Used Angle difference...
Page 300 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions In an example case of a two-phase short circuit failure where the fault is between phases B and C, the angle difference is measured between the polarizing quantity U and operating quantity I in the self-polarizing method. GUID-65CFEC0E-0367-44FB-A116-057DD29FEB79 V1 EN Figure 145: Two-phase short circuit, short circuit is between phases B and C...
Page 301 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions faulted phase is phase A. The polarizing quantity is rotated 90 degrees. The characteristic angle is assumed to be ~ 0 degrees. GUID-6C7D1317-89C4-44BE-A1EB-69BC75863474 V1 EN Figure 146: Single-phase earth fault, phase A In an example of the phasors in a two-phase short circuit failure where the fault is between the phases B and C, the angle difference is measured between the polarizing quantity U and operating quantity I...
Page 302 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-C2EC2EF1-8A84-4A32-818C-6D7620EA9969 V1 EN Figure 147: Two-phase short circuit, short circuit is between phases B and C The equations are valid when network rotating direction is counter- clockwise, that is, ABC. If the network rotating direction is reversed, 180 degrees is added to the calculated angle difference.
Page 303 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions This means that the actuating polarizing quantity is -U GUID-027DD4B9-5844-4C46-BA9C-54784F2300D3 V2 EN Figure 148: Phasors in a single-phase earth fault, phases A-N, and two-phase short circuit, phases B and C, when the actuating polarizing quantity is the negative-sequence voltage -U2 Positive-sequence voltage as polarizing quantity Table 299:...
Page 304 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions -90° GUID-1937EA60-4285-44A7-8A7D-52D7B66FC5A6 V3 EN Figure 149: Phasors in a single-phase earth fault, phase A to ground, and a two- phase short circuit, phases B-C, are short-circuited when the polarizing quantity is the positive-sequence voltage U Network rotation direction Typically, the network rotatiion direction is counterclockwise and defined as "ABC".
Page 305: Application
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions NETWORK ROTATION ABC NETWORK ROTATION ACB GUID-BF32C1D4-ECB5-4E96-A27A-05C637D32C86 V2 EN Figure 150: Examples of network rotation direction 4.1.4.7 Application DPH3xPDOC is used as short circuit protection in three-phase distribution or sub transmission networks operating at 50 Hz. In radial networks, phase overcurrent IEDs are often sufficient for the short circuit protection of lines, transformers and other equipment.
Page 306 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions a risk that the fault situation in one part of the feeding system can de-energize the whole system connected to the LV-side. GUID-1A2BD0AD-B217-46F4-A6B4-6FC6E6256EB3 V2 EN Figure 151: Overcurrent protection of parallel lines using directional IEDs DPH3xPDOC can be used for parallel operating transformer applications.
Page 307: Signals
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions direction of the directional functionality. The double arrows define the non- directional functionality where faults can be detected in both directions. GUID-276A9D62-BD74-4335-8F20-EC1731B58889 V1 EN Figure 153: Closed-ring network topology where feeding lines are protected with directional overcurrent IEDs 4.1.4.8 Signals...
Page 308 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for current multiplier NON_DIR BOOLEAN 0=False Forces protection to non-directional Table 301: DPH3HPDOC Input signals Name Type Default...
Page 309: Settings
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Name Type Description OPR_C BOOLEAN Operate phase C ST_A BOOLEAN Start phase A ST_B BOOLEAN Start phase B ST_C BOOLEAN Start phase C 4.1.4.9 Settings Table 304: DPH3LPDOC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default...
Page 310 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 305: DPH3LPDOC Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type 2=Def time reset 3=Inverse reset Pol quantity 1=Self pol 5=Cross pol Reference quantity used to determine 4=Neg.
Page 311 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 308: DPH3HPDOC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 0.10...40.00 0.01 0.10 Start value Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value Directional mode 1=Non-directional 2=Forward Directional mode 2=Forward 3=Reverse...
Page 312: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Curve parameter D 0.46...30.00 29.10 Parameter D for customer programmable curve Curve parameter E 0.0...1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable curve Num of start phases 1=1 out of 3 1=1 out of 3 Number of phases required for operate 2=2 out of 3...
Page 313 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description ANGLE_B FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Calculated angle difference, Phase B ANGLE_C FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Calculated angle difference, Phase C DPH3LPDOC Enum 1=on Status 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off Table 313: DPH3HPDOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range)
Page 314: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.1.4.11 Technical data Table 314: DPH3xPDOC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy DPH3LPDOC Depending on the frequency of the current measured: f ±2 Hz Current: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × I Voltage: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 ×...
Page 315: Function Block
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.1.5.2 Function block GUID-CC4ABE69-184F-4861-8CAE-38FF1CD44407 V1 EN Figure 154: Function block 4.1.5.3 Functionality The three-phase voltage-dependent overcurrent protection function PHPVOC is used for single-phase, two-phase or three-phase voltage-dependent time overcurrent protection of generators against overcurrent and short circuit conditions. The function starts when the input phase current exceeds a limit which is dynamically calculated based on the measured terminal voltages.
Page 316 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Effective start value calculator The normal starting current above which the overcurrent protection starts is set through the Start value setting. The Effective start value of the current may need to be changed during certain conditions like magnetizing inrush or when the terminal voltages drop due to a fault.
Page 317 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-5D79BE18-92AB-4BDC-8731-D57299D5286A V1 EN Figure 156: Effective start value for voltage step characteristic The voltage slope characteristic is achieved by assigning different values to Voltage high limit and Voltage low limit. The effective start value calculation is based on the equations.
Page 318 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-D9822D90-528D-418D-8422-25F5D2A4637B V1 EN Figure 157: Effective start value or voltage slope characteristic To achieve the voltage slope characteristics, Voltage high limit must always be set to a value greater than Voltage low limit. If Voltage high limit is lower than Voltage low limit, the voltage step characteristic is active with Voltage low limit being the cutoff value.
Page 319 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Voltage and input control mode If Control mode is set to "Voltage and input Ctrl", both the "Voltage control" and "Input control" modes are used. However, the “Input control” functionality is dominant over the “Voltage control” mode when ENA_U_MULT is active. No voltage dependency mode When Control mode is set to "No Volt dependency", the effective start value has no voltage dependency and the function acts as a normal time overcurrent function with...
Page 320: Application
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions "Inverse reset". The reset curve type "Immediate" causes an immediate reset. With the reset curve type "Def time reset", the reset time depends on the Reset delay time setting. With the reset curve type "Inverse reset", the reset time depends on the current during the drop-off situation.
Page 321: Signals
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions protection, might not detect this kind of fault situation. In some cases, the automatic voltage regulator AVR can help to maintain high fault currents by controlling the generator excitation system. If the AVR is out of service or if there is an internal fault in the operation of AVR, the low fault currents can go unnoticed and therefore a voltage-depended overcurrent protection should be used for backup.
Page 322: Settings
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 316: PHPVOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start 4.1.5.7 Settings Table 317: PHPVOC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 0.05...5.00 0.01 0.05 Start value Start value low 0.05...1.00...
Page 323: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 319: PHPVOC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On 5=off Num of start phases 1=1 out of 3 1=1 out of 3 Number of phases required for operate 2=2 out of 3 activation...
Page 324: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.1.5.9 Technical data Table 322: PHPVOC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current and voltage: ±2 Hz Current: ±1.5% of the set value or ± 0.002 × I Voltage: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 ×...
Page 325: Functionality
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.1.6.3 Functionality The increased utilization of power systems closer to the thermal limits has generated a need for a thermal overload function for power lines as well. A thermal overload is in some cases not detected by other protection functions, and the introduction of the three-phase thermal protection for feeders, cables and distribution transformers function T1PTTR allows the protected circuit to operate closer to the thermal limits.
Page 326 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Max current selector The max current selector of the function continuously checks the highest measured TRMS phase current value. The selector reports the highest value to the temperature estimator. Temperature estimator The final temperature rise is calculated from the highest of the three-phase currents according to the expression: ...
Page 327 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Θ calculated present temperature Θ calculated temperature at previous time step Θ calculated final temperature with actual current final Δt time step between calculation of actual temperature Time constant thermal time constant for the protected device (line or cable), set The actual temperature of the protected component (line or cable) is calculated by adding the ambient temperature to the calculated temperature, as shown above.
Page 328: Application
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions In some applications, the measured current can involve a number of parallel lines. This is often used for cable lines where one bay connects several parallel cables. By setting the Current multiplier parameter to the number of parallel lines (cables), the actual current on one line is used in the protection algorithm.
Page 329: Signals
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions the conductor temperature continuously. This estimation is made by using a thermal model of the line/cable that is based on the current measurement. If the temperature of the protected object reaches a set warning level, a signal is given to the operator.
Page 330: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 326: T1PTTR Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Current multiplier 1...5 Current multiplier when function is used for parallel lines Table 327: T1PTTR Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default...
Page 331: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.1.6.9 Technical data Table 330: T1PTTR Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 Hz Current measurement: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × I (at currents in the range of 0.01...4.00 ×...
Page 332: Functionality
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.1.7.3 Functionality The three-phase thermal overload, two time constants, protection function T2PTTR protects the transformer mainly from short-time overloads. The transformer is protected from long-time overloads with the oil temperature detector included in its equipment.
Page 333 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Temperature estimator The final temperature rise is calculated from the highest of the three-phase currents according to the expression:   Θ ⋅   final     (Equation 14) GUID-06DE6459-E94A-4FC7-8357-CA58988CEE97 V2 EN highest measured phase current Current reference setting the set value of the...
Page 334 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The warming and cooling following the two time-constant thermal curve is a characteristic of transformers. The thermal time constants of the protected transformer are given in seconds with the Short time constant and Long time constant settings.
Page 335: Application
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The ambient temperature can be measured with RTD measurement. The measured temperature value is connected, for example, from the AI_VAL3 output of the X130 (RTD) function to the AMB_TEMP input of T2PTTR. The Env temperature Set setting is used to define the ambient temperature if the ambient temperature measurement value is not connected to the AMB_TEMP input.
Page 336 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions During stressed situations in power systems, it is required to overload the transformers for a limited time without any risks. The thermal overload protection provides information and makes temporary overloading of transformers possible. The permissible load level of a power transformer is highly dependent on the transformer cooling system.
Page 337: Signals
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 332: Conversion table between one and two time constants Short time constant (min) Long time constant (min) Weighting factor p Single time constant (min) The default Max temperature setting is 105°C. This value is chosen since even though the IEC 60076-7 standard recommends 98°C as the maximum allowable temperature in long-time loading, the standard also states that a transformer can withstand the emergency loading for weeks or even months, which may produce the winding...
Page 338: Settings
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.1.7.7 Settings Table 335: T2PTTR Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Env temperature Set -50...100 °C Ambient temperature used when no external temperature measurement available Temperature rise 0.0...200.0 °C 78.0 End temperature rise above ambient Max temperature 0.0...200.0...
Page 339: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.1.7.8 Monitored data Table 339: T2PTTR Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description TEMP FLOAT32 -100.0...9999.9 °C The calculated temperature of the protected object TEMP_RL FLOAT32 0.00...99.99 The calculated temperature of the protected object relative to the operate level T_OPERATE INT32...
Page 340: Motor Load Jam Protection Jamptoc
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.1.8 Motor load jam protection JAMPTOC 4.1.8.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Motor load jam protection JAMPTOC Ist> 51LR 4.1.8.2 Function block GUID-FA5FAB32-8730-4985-B228-11B92DD9E626 V2 EN Figure 163: Function block 4.1.8.3 Functionality...
Page 341 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-93025A7F-12BE-4ACD-8BD3-C144CB73F65A V2 EN Figure 164: Functional module diagram Level detector The measured phase currents are compared to the set Start value. The TRMS values of the phase currents are considered for the level detection. The timer module is enabled if at least two of the measured phase currents exceed the set Start value.
Page 342: Application
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.1.8.5 Application The motor protection during stall is primarily needed to protect the motor from excessive temperature rise, as the motor draws large currents during the stall phase. This condition causes a temperature rise in the stator windings. Due to reduced speed, the temperature also rises in the rotor.
Page 343: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 345: JAMPTOC Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0...60000 Reset delay time 4.1.8.8 Monitored data Table 346: JAMPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START BOOLEAN...
Page 344: Loss Of Load Supervision Loflptuc
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.1.9 Loss of load supervision LOFLPTUC 4.1.9.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Loss of load supervision LOFLPTUC 3I< 4.1.9.2 Function block GUID-B7774D44-24DB-48B1-888B-D9E3EA741F23 V2 EN Figure 165: Function block 4.1.9.3 Functionality...
Page 345: Application
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Level detector 1 This module compares the phase currents (RMS value) to the set Start value high setting. If all the phase current values are less than the set Start value high value, the loss of load condition is detected and an enable signal is sent to the timer.
Page 346: Signals
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.1.9.6 Signals Table 349: LOFLPTUC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block all binary outputs by resetting timers Table 350: LOFLPTUC Output signals Name Type...
Page 347: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.1.9.9 Technical data Table 355: LOFLPTUC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 Hz ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × I Start time Typically 300 ms Reset time Typically 40 ms...
Page 348: Functionality
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.1.10.3 Functionality The loss of phase, undercurrent, protection function PHPTUC is used to detect an undercurrent that is considered as a fault condition. PHPTUC starts when the current is less than the set limit. Operation time characteristics are according to definite time (DT).
Page 349: Application
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The protection relay does not accept the Start value to be smaller than Current block value Level detector 2 This is a low-current detection module that monitors the de-energized condition of the protected object. The module compares the phase currents (RMS value) to the Start value low setting.
Page 350: Signals
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.1.10.6 Signals Table 357: PHPTUC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block all binary outputs by resetting timers Table 358: PHPTUC Output signals Name Type...
Page 351: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.1.10.8 Monitored data Table 362: PHPTUC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / operate time PHPTUC Enum 1=on Status 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 4.1.10.9 Technical data Table 363: PHPTUC Technical data Characteristic...
Page 352: Functionality
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.1.11.3 Functionality The thermal overload protection for motors function MPTTR protects the electric motors from overheating. MPTTR models the thermal behavior of motor on the basis of the measured load current and disconnects the motor when the thermal content reaches 100 percent.
Page 353 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Internal FLC calculator Full load current (FLC) of the motor is defined by the manufacturer at an ambient temperature of 40°C. Special considerations are required with an application where the ambient temperature of a motor exceeds or remains below 40°C. A motor operating at a higher temperature, even if at or below rated load, can subject the motor windings to excessive temperature similar to that resulting from overload operation at normal ambient temperature.
Page 354 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Thermal level calculator The module calculates the thermal load considering the TRMS and negative-sequence currents. The heating up of the motor is determined by the square value of the load current. However, in case of unbalanced phase currents, the negative-sequence current also causes additional heating.
Page 355 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-A19F9DF2-2F04-401F-AE7A-6CE55F88EB1D V2 EN Figure 171: Thermal behavior The required overload factor and negative sequence current heating effect factor are set by the values of the Overload factor and Negative Seq factor settings. In order to accurately calculate the motor thermal condition, different time constants are used in the above equations.
Page 356 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions and THERMLEV_END outputs respectively. The activation of the BLOCK input does not have any effect on these outputs. Alarm and tripping logic The module generates alarm, restart inhibit and tripping signals. When the thermal level exceeds the set value of the Alarm thermal value setting, the ALARM output is activated.
Page 357 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 3840 1920 GUID-F3D1E6D3-86E9-4C0A-BD43-350003A07292 V1 EN Figure 172: Trip curves when no prior load and p=20...100 %. Overload factor = 1.05. 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 358 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 3840 1920 160 320 480 640 GUID-44A67C51-E35D-4335-BDBD-5CD0D3F41EF1 V1 EN Figure 173: Trip curves at prior load 1 x FLC and p=100 %, Overload factor = 1.05. 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 359 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 3840 1920 GUID-5CB18A7C-54FC-4836-9049-0CE926F35ADF V1 EN Figure 174: Trip curves at prior load 1 x FLC and p=50 %. Overload factor = 1.05. 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 360: Application
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.1.11.5 Application MPTTR is intended to limit the motor thermal level to predetermined values during the abnormal motor operating conditions. This prevents a premature motor insulation failure. The abnormal conditions result in overheating and include overload, stalling, failure to start, high ambient temperature, restricted motor ventilation, reduced speed operation, frequent starting or jogging, high or low line voltage or frequency, mechanical failure of the driven load, improper installation and unbalanced line...
Page 361 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions When protecting the objects without hot spot tendencies, for example motors started with soft starters, and cables, the value of Weighting factor p is set to 100 percent. With the value of Weighting factor p set to 100 percent, the thermal level decreases slowly after a heavy load condition.
Page 362 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4000 3000 2000 1000 Cold curve 1.05 GUID-B6F9E655-4FFC-4B06-841A-68DADE785BF2 V1 EN Figure 175: The influence of Weighting factor p at prior load 1xFLC, timeconstant = 640 s, and Overload factor = 1.05 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 363 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Setting the overload factor The value of Overload factor defines the highest permissible continuous load. The recommended value is 1.05. Setting the negative sequence factor During the unbalance condition, the symmetry of the stator currents is disturbed and a counter-rotating negative sequence component current is set up.
Page 364: Signals
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Setting the thermal restart level The restart disable level can be calculated as follows:   startup time of the motor θ  0 0 % + margin  − ×   operate time when no prior load ...
Page 365: Settings
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.1.11.7 Settings Table 368: MPTTR Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Overload factor 1.00...1.20 0.01 1.05 Overload factor (k) Alarm thermal value 50.0...100.0 95.0 Thermal level above which function gives an alarm Restart thermal Val 20.0...80.0...
Page 366: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.1.11.8 Monitored data Table 371: MPTTR Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description TEMP_RL FLOAT32 0.00...9.99 The calculated temperature of the protected object relative to the operate level TEMP_AMB FLOAT32 -99...999 °C The ambient temperature used in the calculation THERMLEV_ST FLOAT32...
Page 367: Earth-Fault Protection
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Earth-fault protection 4.2.1 Non-directional earth-fault protection EFxPTOC 4.2.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Non-directional earth-fault protection, EFLPTOC Io> 51N-1 low stage Non-directional earth-fault protection, EFHPTOC Io>> 51N-2 high stage Non-directional earth-fault protection,...
Page 368: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.2.1.4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". The operation of EFxPTOC can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
Page 369: Measurement Modes
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions timer runs until the set Reset delay time value is exceeded. When the IDMT curves are selected, the Type of reset curve setting can be set to "Immediate", "Def time reset" or "Inverse reset". The reset curve type "Immediate" causes an immediate reset. With the reset curve type "Def time reset", the reset time depends on the Reset delay time setting.
Page 370: Timer Characteristics
IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the special characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. In addition to this, a user programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are applicable.
Page 371: Application
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Operating curve type EFLPTOC EFHPTOC (14) IEC Long Time Inverse (15) IEC Definite Time (17) User programmable curve (18) RI type (19) RD type EFIPTOC supports only definite time characteristics. For a detailed description of timers, see the General function block features section in this manual.
Page 372: Signals
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions EFLPTOC contains several types of time-delay characteristics. EFHPTOC and EFIPTOC are used for fast clearance of serious earth faults. 4.2.1.8 Signals Table 377: EFLPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Residual current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode...
Page 373: Settings
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.2.1.9 Settings Table 383: EFLPTOC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 0.010...5.000 0.005 0.010 Start value Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00...
Page 374 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 386: EFLPTOC Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Minimum operate time 20...60000 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves Reset delay time 0...60000 Reset delay time Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode 2=DFT...
Page 375: Monitored Data
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 390: EFHPTOC Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Minimum operate time 20...60000 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves Reset delay time 0...60000 Reset delay time Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode 2=DFT...
Page 376: Technical Data
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 395: EFHPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / operate time EFHPTOC Enum 1=on Status 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off Table 396: EFIPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range)
Page 377: Technical Revision History
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Characteristic Value Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms Suppression of harmonics RMS: No suppression DFT: -50 dB at f = n ×...
Page 378: Directional Earth-Fault Protection Defxpdef
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Technical revision Change Time Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for the multiplier setting Internal improvement Internal improvement 4.2.2 Directional earth-fault protection DEFxPDEF 4.2.2.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number...
Page 379: Operation Principle
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs, timers or the function itself, if desired. 4.2.2.4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "On"...
Page 380 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions "Measured Io" and "Measured Uo" are selected. The nominal values for residual current and residual voltage are obtained from CT and VT ratios entered in Residual current Io: Configuration/Analog inputs/Current (Io,CT): 100 A : 1 A. The Residual voltage Uo: Configuration/Analog inputs/Voltage (Uo,VT): 11.547 kV : 100 V.
Page 381 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions If Pol quantity is set to "Neg. seq. volt", the negative sequence current and negative sequence voltage are used for directional calculation. In the phasor diagrams representing the operation of DEFxPDEF, the polarity of the polarizing quantity (Uo or U2) is reversed, that is, the polarizing quantity in the phasor diagrams is either -Uo or -U2.
Page 382 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The network rotating direction is set in the protection relay using the parameter in the HMI menu: Configuration/System/Phase rotation. The default parameter value is "ABC". If the Enable voltage limit setting is set to "True", the magnitude of the polarizing quantity is checked even if Directional mode is set to "Non- directional"...
Page 383 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 402: Monitored data values Monitored data values Description FAULT_DIR The detected direction of fault during fault situations, that is, when START output is active. DIRECTION The momentary operating direction indication output. ANGLE Also called operating angle, shows the angle difference between the polarizing quantity (Uo, ) and operating quantity (Io, I ANGLE_RCA...
Page 384: Directional Earth-Fault Principles
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions operating curve type is selected, an immediate reset occurs during the drop-off situation. The setting Time multiplier is used for scaling the IDMT operate and reset times. The setting parameter Minimum operate time defines the minimum desired operate time for IDMT.
Page 385 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions positive if the operating current lags the polarizing quantity and negative if it leads the polarizing quantity. Example 1 The "Phase angle" mode is selected, compensated network (φRCA = 0 deg) => Characteristic angle = 0 deg GUID-829C6CEB-19F0-4730-AC98-C5528C35A297 V2 EN Figure 180: Definition of the relay characteristic angle, RCA=0 degrees in a...
Page 386 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-D72D678C-9C87-4830-BB85-FE00F5EA39C2 V2 EN Figure 181: Definition of the relay characteristic angle, RCA=+60 degrees in a solidly earthed network Example 3 The "Phase angle" mode is selected, isolated network (φRCA = -90 deg) => Characteristic angle = -90 deg 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 387 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-67BE307E-576A-44A9-B615-2A3B184A410D V2 EN Figure 182: Definition of the relay characteristic angle, RCA=–90 degrees in an isolated network Directional earth-fault protection in an isolated neutral network In isolated networks, there is no intentional connection between the system neutral point and earth.
Page 388 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions A070441 V1 EN Figure 183: Earth-fault situation in an isolated network Directional earth-fault protection in a compensated network In compensated networks, the capacitive fault current and the inductive resonance coil current compensate each other. The protection cannot be based on the reactive current measurement, since the current of the compensation coil would disturb the operation of the protection relays.
Page 389 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions coil in compensated networks. As a result the characteristic angle is set automatically to suit the earthing method used. The RCA_CTL input can be used to change the operation criteria as described in Table 403 Table 404.
Page 390: Measurement Modes
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions A070443 V3 EN Figure 185: Extended operation area in directional earth-fault protection 4.2.2.6 Measurement modes The function operates on three alternative measurement modes: "RMS", "DFT" and "Peak-to-Peak". The measurement mode is selected with the Measurement mode setting.
Page 391: Timer Characteristics
IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the special characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. In addition to this, a user programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are applicable.
Page 392: Directional Earth-Fault Characteristics
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 407: Reset time characteristics supported by different stages Reset curve type DEFLPDEF DEFHPDEF Note (1) Immediate Available for all operate time curves (2) Def time reset Available for all operate time curves (3) Inverse reset Available only for ANSI and user programmable curves 4.2.2.8...
Page 393 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-92004AD5-05AA-4306-9574-9ED8D51524B4 V2 EN Figure 186: Configurable operating sectors in phase angle characteristic Table 408: Momentary operating direction Fault direction The value for DIRECTION Angle between the polarizing and operating 0 = unknown quantity is not in any of the defined sectors. Angle between the polarizing and operating 1= forward quantity is in the forward sector.
Page 394 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions to operate in the directional mode as non-directional, since the directional information is invalid. Iosin(φ) and Iocos(φ) criteria A more modern approach to directional protection is the active or reactive current measurement. The operating characteristic of the directional operation depends on the earthing principle of the network.
Page 395 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Iosin(φ) criterion selected, forward-type fault => FAULT_DIR = 1 GUID-560EFC3C-34BF-4852-BF8C-E3A2A7750275 V2 EN Figure 187: Operating characteristic Iosin(φ) in forward fault The operating sector is limited by angle correction, that is, the operating sector is 180 degrees - 2*(angle correction).
Page 396 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-10A890BE-8C81-45B2-9299-77DD764171E1 V2 EN Figure 188: Operating characteristic Iosin(φ) in reverse fault Example 3. Iocos(φ) criterion selected, forward-type fault => FAULT_DIR = 1 GUID-11E40C1F-6245-4532-9199-2E2F1D9B45E4 V2 EN Figure 189: Operating characteristic Iocos(φ) in forward fault Example 4. 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 397 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Iocos(φ) criterion selected, reverse-type fault => FAULT_DIR = 2 GUID-54ACB854-F11D-4AF2-8BDB-69E5F6C13EF1 V2 EN Figure 190: Operating characteristic Iocos(φ) in reverse fault Phase angle 80 The operation criterion phase angle 80 is selected with the Operation mode setting by using the value "Phase angle 80".
Page 398 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-EFC9438D-9169-4733-9BE9-6B343F37001A V2 EN Figure 191: Operating characteristic for phase angle 80 Io / % of I Min forward angle 80 deg Operating zone 3% of In 70 deg Non- 1% of In operating zone GUID-49D23ADF-4DA0-4F7A-8020-757F32928E60 V2 EN Figure 192: Phase angle 80 amplitude (Directional mode = Forward)
Page 399 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Phase angle 88 implements the same functionality as the phase angle but with the following differences: • The Max forward angle and Max reverse angle settings cannot be set but they have a fixed value of 88 degrees •...
Page 400: Application
Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Io / % of I 88 deg 100% of In Min forward angle 85 deg 20% of In 73 deg 1% of In GUID-F9F1619D-E1B5-4650-A5CB-B62A7F6B0A90 V2 EN Figure 194: Phase angle 88 amplitude (Directional mode = Forward) 4.2.2.9 Application The directional earth-fault protection DEFxPDEF is designed for protection and...
Page 401 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions same when the resonance coil is disconnected from between the neutral point and earth. System neutral earthing is meant to protect personnel and equipment and to reduce interference for example in telecommunication systems. The neutral earthing sets challenges for protection systems, especially for earth-fault protection.
Page 402 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions core balance current transformers. The following figure describes how measuring transformers can be connected to the protection relay. A070697 V2 EN Figure 195: Connection of measuring transformers 4.2.2.10 Signals Table 410: DEFLPDEF Input signals Name Type Default...
Page 403 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 412: DEFLPDEF Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start Table 413: DEFHPDEF Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start 4.2.2.11 Settings Table 414: DEFLPDEF Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 404 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 415: DEFLPDEF Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type 2=Def time reset 3=Inverse reset Operation mode 1=Phase angle 1=Phase angle Operation criteria 2=IoSin 3=IoCos...
Page 405 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 418: DEFHPDEF Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 0.10...40.00 0.01 0.10 Start value Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value Directional mode 1=Non-directional 2=Forward Directional mode 2=Forward 3=Reverse...
Page 406 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Curve parameter C 0.02...2.00 2.00 Parameter C for customer programmable curve Curve parameter D 0.46...30.00 29.10 Parameter D for customer programmable curve Curve parameter E 0.0...1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable curve Table 421: DEFHPDEF Non group settings (Advanced)
Page 407 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description ANGLE FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Angle between polarizing and operating quantity I_OPER FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Calculated operating current DEFLPDEF Enum 1=on Status 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off Table 423: DEFHPDEF Monitored data Name Type Values (Range)
Page 408 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.2.2.13 Technical data Table 424: DEFxPDEF Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 Hz DEFLPDEF Current: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × I Voltage ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 ×...
Page 409 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.2.2.14 Technical revision history Table 425: DEFHPDEF Technical revision history Technical revision Change Maximum value changed to 180 deg for the forward angle setting Added a setting parameter for the "Measured Io" or "Calculated Io" selection and setting parameter for the "Measured Uo", "Calculated Uo"...
Page 410 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.2.3.2 Function block A070663 V2 EN Figure 196: Function block 4.2.3.3 Functionality The transient/intermittent earth-fault protection function INTRPTEF is a function designed for the protection and clearance of permanent and intermittent earth faults in distribution and sub-transmission networks.
Page 411 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions for Uo-channel is given in the global setting Configuration/Analog inputs/Voltage (Uo,VT). If "Calculated Uo" is selected, the voltage ratio is obtained from phase- voltage channels given in the global setting Configuration/Analog inputs/Voltage (3U,VT). Example 1: Uo is measured from open-delta connected VTs (20/sqrt(3) kV : 100/ sqrt(3) V : 100/3 V).
Page 412 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions To satisfy the sensitivity requirements, basic earth-fault protection (based on fundamental frequency phasors) should always be used in parallel with the INTRPTEF function. The Fault indication logic module determines the direction of the fault. The fault direction determination is secured by multi-frequency neutral admittance measurement and special filtering techniques.
Page 413 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-BE2849D3-015B-4A05-85EF-FD7E8EF29CA3 V1 EN Figure 198: Example of INTRPTEF operation in ”Transient EF” mode in the faulty feeder In the "Intermittent EF" mode the OPERATE output is activated when the following conditions are fulfilled: • the number of transients that have been detected exceeds the Peak counter limit setting •...
Page 414 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-27C77008-B292-4112-9CF6-4B95EE19B9EC V1 EN Figure 199: Example of INTRPTEF operation in ”Intermittent EF” mode in the faulty feeder, Peak counter limit=3 The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is available in the monitored data view.
Page 415 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block OPERATE output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not activated. 4.2.3.5 Application INTRPTEF is an earth-fault function dedicated to operate in intermittent and permanent earth faults occurring in distribution and sub-transmission networks.
Page 416 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Earth-fault transients In general, earth faults generate transients in currents and voltages. There are several factors that affect the magnitude and frequency of these transients, such as the fault moment on the voltage wave, fault location, fault resistance and the parameters of the feeders and the supplying transformers.
Page 417 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.2.3.7 Settings Table 429: INTRPTEF Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Directional mode 1=Non-directional 2=Forward Directional mode 2=Forward 3=Reverse Operate delay time 40...1200000 Operate delay time Voltage start value 0.05...0.50 0.01 0.20 Voltage start value...
Page 418 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.2.3.9 Technical data Table 433: INTRPTEF Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy (Uo criteria with transient Depending on the frequency of the measured protection) current: f ±2 Hz ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Uo Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms Suppression of harmonics...
Page 419 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.2.4.2 Function block GUID-70A9F388-3588-4550-A291-CB0E74E95F6E V2 EN Figure 202: Function block 4.2.4.3 Functionality The admittance-based earth-fault protection function EFPADM provides a selective earth-fault protection function for high-resistance earthed, unearthed and compensated networks. It can be applied for the protection of overhead lines as well as with underground cables.
Page 420 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.2.4.4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". The operation of EFPADM can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
Page 421 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Uo requires that all three phase-to-earth voltages are connected to the protection relay. Uo cannot be calculated from the phase-to-phase voltages. When the residual voltage exceeds the set threshold Voltage start value, an earth fault is detected and the neutral admittance calculation is released.
Page 422 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions − ∆ fault prefault − − − ∆ fault prefault (Equation 26) GUID-B0611FF1-46FD-4E81-A11D-4721F0AF7BF8 V1 EN Calculated neutral admittance [Siemens] Residual current during the fault [Amperes] fault Residual voltage during the fault [Volts] fault Prefault residual current [Amperes] prefault Prefault residual voltage [Volts] prefault...
Page 423 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Equation 27 shows that in case of outside faults, the measured admittance equals the admittance of the protected feeder with a negative sign. The measured admittance is dominantly reactive; the small resistive part of the measured admittance is due to the leakage losses of the feeder.
Page 424 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions A B C Protected feeder Background network Reverse Fault eTot Im(Yo) Re(Yo) Reverse fault: Yo ≈ -j*I GUID-B852BF65-9C03-49F2-8FA9-E958EB37FF13 V1 EN Figure 204: Admittance calculation during a reverse fault Resistance of the parallel resistor Inductance of the compensation coil Resistance of the neutral earthing resistor Phase-to-earth admittance of the protected feeder Phase-to-earth admittance of the background network...
Page 425 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The result is valid regardless of the neutral earthing method. In this case, the resistive part of the measured admittance is due to leakage losses of the protected feeder. As they are typically very small, the resistive part is close to zero. Due to inaccuracies in the voltage and current measurement, the small real part of the apparent neutral admittance may appear positive.
Page 426 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The admittance is dominantly reactive; the small resistive part of the measured admittance is due to the leakage losses of the background network. Theoretically, the measured admittance is located in the first quadrant in the admittance plane, close to the im(Yo) axis, see Figure 205.
Page 427 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions A B C Protected feeder Forward Fault eTot Background network eTot Forward fault, high resistance earthed network: Yo ≈ (I +j*(I ))/U eTot Im(Yo) Forward fault, unearthed network: Yo ≈ j*(I eTot Under-comp. (K<1) Re(Yo) Resonance (K=1) Reverse fault:...
Page 428 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions when the compensated network is operated either in the undercompensated or overcompensated mode. For example, in a 15 kV compensated network, the magnitude of the earth-fault current of the protected feeder is 10 A (Rf = 0 Ω) and the magnitude of the network is 100 A (Rf = 0 Ω).
Page 429 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions selected with the Operation mode and Directional mode settings. Operation mode defines which operation criterion or criteria are enabled and Directional mode defines if the forward, reverse or non-directional boundary lines for that particular operation mode are activated.
Page 430 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 100 1 5 00 milliSiemens 4 33 milliSiemens ⋅ 11547 100 (Equation 38) GUID-9CFD2291-9894-4D04-9499-DF38F1F64D59 V1 EN GUID-FD8DAB15-CA27-40B0-9A43-FCF0881DB21E V2 EN Figure 206: Admittance characteristic with different operation modes when Directional mode = "Non-directional" 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 431 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-7EDB14B9-64B4-449C-9290-70A4CC2D588F V2 EN Figure 207: Admittance characteristic with different operation modes when Directional mode = "Forward" 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 432 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-C847609F-E261-4265-A1D9-3C449F8672A1 V2 EN Figure 208: Admittance characteristic with different operation modes when Directional mode = "Reverse" Timer Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set with the Operate delay time setting, the OPERATE output is activated.
Page 433 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions deactivated. The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is available in the monitored data view. Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function.
Page 434 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-AD789221-4073-4587-8E82-CD9BBD672AE0 V2 EN Figure 209: Overadmittance characteristic. Left figure: classical origin-centered admittance circle. Right figure: admittance circle is set off from the origin. Non-directional overconductance characteristic The non-directional overconductance criterion is enabled with the Operation mode setting set to "Go"...
Page 435 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-F5487D41-6B8E-4A7A-ABD3-EBF7254ADC4C V2 EN Figure 210: Non-directional overconductance characteristic. Left figure: classical non-directional overconductance criterion. Middle figure: characteristic is tilted with negative tilt angle. Right figure: characteristic is tilted with positive tilt angle. Forward directional overconductance characteristic The forward directional overconductance criterion is enabled with the Operation mode setting set to "Go"...
Page 436 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Forward directional oversusceptance characteristic The forward directional oversusceptance criterion is enabled with the Operation mode setting set to "Bo" and Directional mode to "Forward". The characteristic is defined by one oversusceptance boundary line with the Susceptance forward setting. For the sake of application flexibility, the boundary line can be tilted by the angle defined with the Susceptance tilt Ang setting.
Page 437 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Operation is achieved when the measured admittance moves outside the characteristic. The combined overadmittance and overconductance criterion is applicable in unearthed, high-resistance earthed and compensated networks or in systems where the system earthing may temporarily change during normal operation from compensated network to unearthed system.
Page 438 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions boundary line counterclockwise from the vertical axis. A positive Susceptance tilt Ang value rotates the oversusceptance boundary line counterclockwise from the horizontal axis. In case of the non-directional conductance and susceptance criteria, the Conductance reverse setting must be set to a smaller value than Conductance forward and the Susceptance reverse setting must be set to a smaller value than Susceptance forward.
Page 439 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-0A34B498-4FDB-44B3-A539-BAE8F10ABDF0 V2 EN Figure 215: Combined non-directional overconductance and non-directional oversusceptance characteristic The non-directional overconductance and non-directional oversusceptance characteristic provides a good sensitivity and selectivity when the characteristic is set to cover the total admittance of the protected feeder with a proper margin.
Page 440 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Residual overvoltage condition is used as a start condition for the admittance-based earth-fault protection. When the residual voltage exceeds the set threshold Voltage start value, an earth fault is detected and the neutral admittance calculation is released. In order to guarantee a high security of protection, that is, avoid false starts, the Voltage start value setting must be set above the highest possible value of Uo during normal operation with a proper margin.
Page 441 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Unearthed Resonance, K = 1 Over/Under-Compensated, K = 1.2/0.8 Rf = 500 ohm Rf = 2500 ohm Rf = 5000 ohm Rf = 10000 ohm 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Total earth f ault current (A), Rf = 0 ohm...
Page 442 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Example In a 15 kV, 50 Hz compensated network, the maximum value for Uo during the healthy state is 10%×Uph. Maximum earth-fault current of the system is 100 A. The maximum earth-fault current of the protected feeder is 10 A (Rf = 0 Ω). The applied active current forcing scheme uses a 15 A resistor (at 15 kV), which is connected in parallel to the coil during the fault after a 1.0 second delay.
Page 443 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Directional mode = "Non-directional" The admittance characteristic is set to cover the total admittance of the protected feeder with a proper margin, see Figure 219. Different setting groups can be used to allow adaptation of protection settings to different feeder and network configurations. Conductance forward This setting should be set based on the parallel resistor value of the coil.
Page 444 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-AE9BB46E-B927-43F6-881A-A96D3410268D V2 EN Figure 219: Admittances of the example 4.2.4.7 Signals Table 436: EFPADM Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Residual current SIGNAL Residual voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode RELEASE BOOLEAN 0=False...
Page 445 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.2.4.8 Settings Table 438: EFPADM Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Voltage start value 0.01...2.00 0.01 0.15 Voltage start value Directional mode 1=Non-directional 2=Forward Directional mode 2=Forward 3=Reverse Operation mode 1=Yo 1=Yo Operation criteria...
Page 446 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Min operate current 0.01...1.00 0.01 0.01 Minimum operating current Min operate voltage 0.01...1.00 0.01 0.01 Minimum operating voltage Io signal Sel 1=Measured Io 1=Measured Io Selection for used Io signal 2=Calculated Io Uo signal Sel 1=Measured Uo...
Page 447 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.2.5 Rotor earth-fault protection MREFPTOC 4.2.5.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Rotor earth-fault protection MREFPTOC Io>R 4.2.5.2 Function block GUID-9547375B-008F-4829-897A-5045ED3A922B V1 EN Figure 220: Function block 4.2.5.3 Functionality The rotor earth-fault protection function MREFPTOC is used to detect an earth fault...
Page 448 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-8E91D45E-FF32-4648-915A-970AD1CCF19B V1 EN Figure 221: Functional module diagram Level detector 1 The measured rotor earth-fault current (DFT value) is compared to the Operate start value setting. If the measured value exceeds that of the Operate start value setting, Level detector 1 sends a signal to start the Timer 1 module.
Page 449 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Timer 2 Once activated, the Timer activates the alarm timer. The timer characteristic is according to DT. When the alarm timer has reached the value set by Alarm delay time in the DT mode, the ALARM output is activated. If a drop-off situation occurs, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the alarm delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated.
Page 450 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The auxiliary AC voltage forms a small charging current I to flow via the coupling capacitors, resistances of the brushes and the leakage capacitance between the field circuit and earth. The field-to-earth capacitance C affects the level of the resulting current to an extent which is a few milliamperes during normal no-fault operating conditions.
Page 451 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-42F3FB0E-D0A0-4363-A00C-D7365DE25ACE V1 EN Figure 223: Measured current as a function of the rotor earth-fault resistance with various field-to-earth capacitance values with the measuring circuit resistance R = 3.0 Ω, f = 50 Hz. Only one coupling capacitor is used.
Page 452 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.2.5.6 Signals Table 444: MREFPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Residual current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode Table 445: MREFPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN...
Page 453 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.2.5.8 Monitored data Table 449: MREFPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / operate time MREFPTOC Enum 1=on Status 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 4.2.5.9 Technical data Table 450: MREFPTOC Technical data Characteristic...
Page 454 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.2.6.2 Function block HAEFPTOC OPERATE I_REF_RES START BLOCK GUID-A27B40F5-1E7D-4880-BBC4-3B07B73E9067 V2 EN Figure 224: Function block 4.2.6.3 Functionality The harmonics-based earth-fault protection function HAEFPTOC is used instead of a traditional earth-fault protection in networks where a fundamental frequency component of the earth-fault current is low due to compensation.
Page 455 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-DFEDB90A-4ECE-4BAA-9987-87F02BA0798A V3 EN Figure 225: Functional module diagram Harmonics calculation This module feeds the measured residual current to the high-pass filter, where the frequency range is limited to start from two times the fundamental frequency of the network (for example, in a 50 Hz network the cutoff frequency is 100 Hz), that is, summing the harmonic components of the network from the second harmonic.
Page 456 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Level detector The harmonics current is compared to the Start value setting. If the value exceeds the value of the Start value setting, Level detector sends an enabling signal to the Timer module. Current comparison The maximum of the harmonics currents reported by other parallel feeders in the substation, that is, in the same busbar, is fed to the function through the I_REF_RES input.
Page 457 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions In case of a communication failure, the start duration may change substantially depending on the user settings. When the programmable IDMT curve is selected, the operation time characteristics are defined with the Curve parameter A, Curve parameter B, Curve parameter C, Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E parameters.
Page 458 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers" mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value, but the OPERATE output is not deactivated when blocking is activated. In the "Block all" mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset.
Page 459 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.2.6.6 Signals Table 452: HAEFPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Residual current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode I_REF_RES FLOAT32 Reference current Table 453: HAEFPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE...
Page 460 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 456: HAEFPTOC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On 5=off Curve parameter A 0.0086...120.0000 28.2000 Parameter A for customer programmable curve Curve parameter B 0.0000...0.7120 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable...
Page 461 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Characteristic Value Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms ±5.0% of the set value or ±20 ms Operate time accuracy in IDMT mode Suppression of harmonics -50 dB at f = f -3 dB at f = 13 ×...
Page 462 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs, timers or the function itself, if desired. 4.2.7.4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "On"...
Page 463 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions In the phasor diagrams representing the operation of WPWDE, the polarity of the polarizing quantity (residual voltage Uo) is reversed. Reversing is done by switching the polarity of the residual current measuring channel (See the connection diagram in the application manual).
Page 464 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions coil sometimes is temporarily disconnected. When the coil is disconnected, the compensated network becomes isolated and the Characteristic angle setting must be changed. This can be done automatically with the RCA_CTL input, which results in the addition of -90°...
Page 465 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions quantity is compared to the Min operate current setting and the magnitude of the polarizing quantity is compared to Min operate voltage, and if both the operating quantity and polarizing quantity are higher than their respective limit, a valid angle is calculated and the residual power calculation module is enabled.
Page 466 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions calculated continuously and it is available in the monitored data view. The power is given in relation to nominal power calculated as Pn = Un × In, where Un and In are obtained from the entered voltage transformer and current transformer ratios entered, and depend on the Io signal Sel and Uo signal Sel settings.
Page 467 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions "Measured Io" and "Measured Uo" are selected. The nominal values for residual current and residual voltage are obtained from CT and VT ratios. Residual current Io: Configuration/Analog inputs/Current (Io, CT): 100 A:1 A Residual voltage Uo: Configuration/Analog inputs/Current (Uo, VT): 11.547 kV: 100 V Residual Current start value of 1.0 ×...
Page 468 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The reset time is identical for both DT or wattmeter IDMT. The reset time depends on the Reset delay time setting. Timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is available in the monitored data view.
Page 469 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-D2ABEA2C-B0E3-4C60-8E70-404E7C62C5FC V1 EN Figure 233: Operation time curves for wattmetric IDMT for S set at 0.15 xPn 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 470 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.2.7.6 Measurement modes The function operates on three alternative measurement modes: "RMS", "DFT" and "Peak-to-Peak". The measurement mode is selected with the Measurement mode setting. 4.2.7.7 Application The wattmetric method is one of the commonly used directional methods for detecting the earth faults especially in compensated networks.
Page 471 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions A typical network with the wattmetric protection is an undercompensated network where the coil current I is the total earth-fault current of the network Ctot Ctot and I is the earth-fault current of the healthy feeder). ΣI ΣI ΣI...
Page 472 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions has zero phase shift compared to the residual voltage. In such networks, the characteristic angle is chosen as 0º. Often the magnitude of an active component is small and must be increased by means of a parallel resistor in a compensation coil. In networks where the neutral point is earthed through a low resistance, the characteristic angle is always 0º.
Page 473 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Characteristic angle -179...180 Characteristic angle Time multiplier 0.05...2.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier for Wattmetric IDMT curves Operating curve type 5=ANSI Def. Time 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time delay curve type 15=IEC Def.
Page 474 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description ANGLE FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Angle between polarizing and operating quantity ANGLE_RCA FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Angle between operating angle and characteristic angle RES_POWER FLOAT32 -160.000...160.0 Calculated residual active power WPWDE Enum 1=on Status 2=blocked...
Page 475 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.2.8.2 Function block GUID-A6EFD856-47F2-462B-8F8D-B64CB0A899AA V1 EN Figure 236: Function block 4.2.8.3 Functionality The multifrequency admittance-based earth-fault protection function MFADPSDE provides selective directional earth-fault protection for high-impedance earthed networks, that is, for compensated, unearthed and high resistance earthed systems. It can be applied for the earth-fault protection of overhead lines and underground cables.
Page 476 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The operation of MFADPSDE can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the following sections. GUID-C69174FA-2E03-4582-A479-107B655C136E V1 EN Figure 237: Functional module diagram General fault criterion The General fault criterion (GFC) module monitors the presence of earth fault in the network and it is based on the value of the fundamental frequency zero-sequence voltage defined as the vector sum of fundamental frequency phase voltage phasors...
Page 477 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Multi-frequency admittance calculation Multi-frequency admittance calculation module calculates neutral admittances utilizing fundamental frequency and the 2nd, 3rd, 5th, 7th and 9th harmonic components of residual current and zero-sequence voltage. The following admittances are calculated, if the magnitude of a particular harmonic in residual current and zero-sequence voltage are measurable by the protection relay.
Page 478 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions For fault direction determination, the fundamental frequency admittance and harmonic susceptances are summed together in phasor format. The result is the sum admittance phasor defined as below.     + ⋅ ∑ ...
Page 479 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions t ( ) osum CPS osum osum osum osum (Equation 53) GUID-8E0FAAAB-F656-4FCF-AC71-42C357E77F3E V1 EN GUID-69E030E7-F3CF-4872-AF6A-3D12002EA3AC V1 EN Figure 238: Principle of Cumulative Phasor Summing (CPS) The CPS technique provides a stable directional phasor quantity despite individual phasors varying in magnitude and phase angle in time due to a non-stable fault type such as restriking or intermittent earth fault.
Page 480 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Figure 240, phasors 1...4 demonstrate the behavior of the directional phasor in different network fault conditions. • Phasor 1 depicts the direction of accumulated sum admittance phasor in case of earth fault outside the protected feeder (assuming that the admittance of the protected feeder is dominantly capacitive).
Page 481 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-8E589324-78E1-4E05-8FD9-49607B977DA2 V1 EN Figure 239: Directional characteristic of MFADPSDE The residual current is recommended to be measured with accurate core balance current transformer to minimize the measurement errors, especially phase displacement. This is especially important, when high sensitivity of protection is targeted.
Page 482 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 1.2 · Reset delay time (minimum of 600 ms). If the fault direction based on the cyclic phasor accumulation is opposite to the function direction output for Reset delay time or 500 ms (minimum of 500 ms), the function is reset and fault direction calculation of MFADPSDE is restarted.
Page 483 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions + ⋅ ⋅ + ⋅ o stab ostab ostab baseres oCosstab oSinsta (Equation 55) GUID-5E6BA356-F1BE-42D6-A6A1-308F93255F7E V1 EN The stabilized fundamental frequency residual current estimate, which is obtained (after conversion) from the corresponding admittance value by multiplying it with the system o stab nominal phase-to-earth voltage value.
Page 484 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-0A818501-E0BD-402F-BF8B-22BA6B91BBA2 V1 EN Figure 240: Illustration of amplitude and resistive current sectors if Operating quantity is set “Adaptive” and Directional mode is set “Forward” The setting rules for current thresholds are given below. In case the “Adaptive” operating quantity is selected, the setting Min operate current should be set to value: p IRtot <...
Page 485 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions For example, if the resistive current of the parallel resistor is 10 A (at primary voltage level), then a value of 0.5 · 10 A = 5 A could be used. The same setting is also applicable in case the coil is disconnected and the network becomes unearthed (as in this case this setting is compared to the amplitude of ).
Page 486 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions hundreds of ohms of fault resistance. Therefore the application of transient detection is limited to low ohmic earth faults. PEAK_IND release Reset timer INTR_EF Reset delay time Reset delay time GUID-A5B0DD30-710A-4E95-82F8-1D2692452239 V2 EN Figure 241: Example of operation of Transient detector: indication of detected transient by PEAK_IND output and detection of restriking or intermittent earth fault by INTR_EF output (setting Peak counter limit...
Page 487 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The START output is activated once Start delay time has elapsed. OPERATE output is activated once Operate delay time has elapsed and the above three conditions are valid. Reset timer is started if any of the above three conditions is not valid. In case fault is transient and self-extinguishes, START output stays activated until the elapse of reset timer (setting Reset delay time).
Page 488 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-B8FF033F-EB15-4D81-8C9F-E45A8F1A6FA8 V1 EN Figure 242: Operation in “General EF” mode Operation mode “Alarming EF” is applicable in all kinds of earth faults in unearthed and compensated networks, where fault detection is only alarming. It is intended to detect earth faults regardless of their type (transient, intermittent or restriking, permanent, high or low ohmic).
Page 489 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions conditions are not valid. In case the fault is transient and self-extinguishes, START output stays activated until the elapse of reset timer (setting Reset delay time). In case detection of temporary earth faults is not desired, the activation of START output can be delayed with setting Start delay time.
Page 490 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Operation mode “Intermittent EF” is dedicated for detecting restriking or intermittent earth faults. A required number of intermittent earth fault transients set with the Peak counter limit setting must be detected for operation. Therefore, transient faults or permanent faults with only initial fault ignition transient are not detected in “Intermittent EF”...
Page 491 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-FDF97C09-E155-422A-8CBC-CD8B3A19101E V1 EN Figure 244: Operation in “Intermittent EF” mode, Peak counter limit = 3 Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking functionality. The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting Configuration/System/ Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode.
Page 492 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Timer If the detected fault direction is opposite to the set directional mode and GFC release is active, BLK_EF output is activated once Start delay time has elapsed. Reset timer is activated at the falling edge of General Fault Criterion release, that is, when zero- sequence voltage falls below Voltage start value.
Page 493 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions systems. It can be applied for the earth-fault protection of overhead lines and underground cables. The operation of MFADPSDE is based on multi-frequency neutral admittance measurement utilizing cumulative phasor summing technique. This concept provides extremely secure, dependable and selective earth-fault protection also in cases where the residual quantities are highly distorted and contain non-fundamental frequency components.
Page 494 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.2.8.6 Signals Table 468: MFADPSDE Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Residual current SIGNAL Residual voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode RELEASE BOOLEAN 0=False External trigger to release neutral admittance protection RESET BOOLEAN...
Page 495 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 473: MFADPSDE Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Io signal Sel 1=Measured Io 1=Measured Io Selection for used Io signal 2=Calculated Io Uo signal Sel 1=Measured Uo 1=Measured Uo Selection for used Uo signal 2=Calculated Uo Peak counter limit...
Page 496 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Differential protection 4.3.1 Stabilized and instantaneous differential protection for machines MPDIF 4.3.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Stabilized and instantaneous differential MPDIF 3dI>M/G 87M/G protection for machines 4.3.1.2 Function block GUID-30DCCB1F-FA35-4315-95AC-323B91D1DD46 V1 EN...
Page 497 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The operation of MPDIF can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections. I_A1 Differential and bias I_B1 calculation I_C1 I_A2 Through Instan- I_B2 OPERATE fault taneous...
Page 498 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions protected object are flowing into it. This causes the biasing current to be considerably smaller, which makes the operation more sensitive during internal faults. The traditional way for calculating the stabilized current is: − (Equation 58) GUID-34FA472E-E419-4A0E-94A3-238D7A3CE5ED V1 EN The module calculates the bias current for all three phases.
Page 499 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions This feature should be used in case of networks where very long time constants are expected. The temporary sensitivity limit is higher to the set operating characteristics. In other words, the temporary limit has superposed the unchanged operating characteristics and temporarily determines the highest sensitivity of the protection.
Page 500 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The end of the first section End section 1 can be set at a desired point within the range of 0 to 100 percent (or % I ). Accordingly, the end of the second section End section 2 can be set within the range of 100 percent to 300 percent (or % I The slope of the operating characteristic for the function block varies in different parts of the range.
Page 501 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The phase angle difference between the two currents I_A1 and I_A2 is theoretically 180 electrical degrees for the external fault and 0 electrical degrees for the internal fault conditions. If the phase angle difference is less than 50 electrical degrees or if the biasing current drops below 30 percent of the differential current, a fault has most likely occurred in the area protected by MPDIF.
Page 502 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-F2067FFD-43A7-478E-8C9F-4E73043141D2 V1 EN Figure 249: Operating characteristic for the stabilized stage of the generator differential protection function 4.3.1.5 Application The differential protection works on the principle of calculating the differential current at the two ends of the winding, that is, the current entering the winding is compared to the current exiting the winding.
Page 503 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions contributions from both the external power system (via the machine or the block circuit breaker) and from the machine itself must be disconnected as fast as possible. The DC restraint feature should be used in case of an application with a long DC time constant in the fault currents is present.
Page 504 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions × (Equation 65) GUID-8EFD1AED-A804-45DD-963F-D453A6B3D782 V2 EN Example 1 The rated burden S of the current transformer 5P20 is 10 VA, the secondary rated current 5A, the internal resistance R = 0.07 Ω and the rated accuracy limit factor F corresponding to the rated burden is 20 (5P20).
Page 505 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions r is needed. The value r = 0.4 is recommended to be used when an accurate value is not available. The required minimum time-to-saturate T in MPDIF is half-fundamental cycle period (10 ms when f = 50 Hz).
Page 506 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions = 10 ms = 1/(1-0.4) = 1.6667 Equation 66 with these values gives the result: − T dc > × × × × ω × − ≈ GUID-46A4591B-876D-4E32-A9AB-29F6C1657644 V2 EN If the actual burden of the current transformer S in the accuracy limit factor equation cannot be reduced low enough to provide a sufficient value for F , there are two...
Page 507 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Connection of current transformers The connections of the primary current transformers are designated as Type 1 and Type 2. • If the positive directions of the winding 1 and winding 2 protection relay currents are opposite, the CT connection type is of "Type 1".
Page 508 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-B3AC7F1B-4714-41B2-9DF9-49BF99BA6123 V1 EN Figure 251: Connection of current transformer of Type 1, example 2 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 509 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-20C85C2F-B738-4E5A-ACE1-7B30EC9799E2 V2 EN Figure 252: Connection of current transformer of Type 2, example 1 GUID-045822E0-C4AF-4C36-89C0-670D6AF85919 V1 EN Figure 253: Connection of current transformer of Type 2, example 2 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 510 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Saturation of current transformers There are basically two types of saturation phenomena that have to be detected: the AC saturation and the DC saturation. The AC saturation is caused by a high fault current where the CT magnetic flux exceeds its maximum value. As a result, the secondary current is distorted as shown in Figure 254.
Page 511 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.3.1.6 Signals Table 476: MPDIF Input signals Name Type Default Description I_A1 Signal Phase A primary current I_B1 Signal Phase B primary current I_C1 Signal Phase C primary current I_A2 Signal Phase A secondary current I_B2 Signal Phase B secondary current...
Page 512 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 480: MPDIF Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On 5=off CT connection type 1=Type 1 1=Type 1 CT connection type. Determined by the 2=Type 2 directions of the connected current transformers...
Page 513 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description I_ANGL_A1_A2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Current phase angle diff between line and neutral side, Phase A I_ANGL_B1_B2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Current phase angle diff between line and neutral side, Phase B I_ANGL_C1_C2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00...
Page 514 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.3.2 Stabilized and instantaneous differential protection for two- winding transformers TR2PTDF 4.3.2.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Stabilized and instantaneous differential TR2PTDF 3dI>T protection for two-winding transformers 4.3.2.2 Function block GUID-134E8524-738D-4232-A6BD-4C9BD2A62F8D V2 EN...
Page 515 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The operation of TR2PTDF can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections. GUID-3A506E19-4E77-4866-8EDC-6264823E1090 V2 EN Figure 257: Functional module diagram Differential calculation TR2PTDF operates phase-wise on a difference of incoming and outgoing currents.
Page 516 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions (Equation 68) GUID-0B35503B-CA7D-4598-A1E4-59C9AA66012D V2 EN In a normal situation, no fault occurs in the area protected by TR2PTDF. Then the currents are equal and the differential current I is zero. In practice, however, the differential current deviates from zero in normal situations. In the power transformer protection, the differential current is caused by CT inaccuracies, variations in tap changer position (if not compensated), transformer no-load current and instantaneous transformer inrush currents.
Page 517 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Example 1 Vector group matching of a Ynd11-connected power transformer on winding 1, CT connection type according to type 1. The Winding 1 type setting is ”YN”, Winding 2 type is “d” and Clock number is “Clk Num 11”. This is compensated internally by giving winding 1 internal compensation value +30°...
Page 518 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions of the phase currents at earth faults occurring outside the protection area is eliminated in the numerically implemented delta connection before the differential current and the biasing current are calculated. This is why the vector group matching is almost always made on the star connected side of the "Ynd"...
Page 519 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The Tap nominal parameter tells the number of the tap, which results in the nominal voltage (and current). When the current tap position deviates from this value, the input current values on the side where the tap changer resides are scaled to match the currents on the other side.
Page 520 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Second harmonic blocking The transformer magnetizing inrush currents occur when energizing the transformer after a period of de-energization. The inrush current can be many times the rated current and the halving time can be up to several seconds. To the differential protection, the inrush current represents a differential current, which would cause the differential protection to operate almost always when the transformer is connected to the network.
Page 521 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions If the peak value of the differential current is very high, that is I >12×In, the limit for the second harmonic blocking is desensitized (in the phase in question) by increasing it proportionally to the peak value of the differential current. The connection of the power transformer against a fault inside the protected area does not delay the operation of the tripping, because in such a situation the blocking based on the second harmonic of the differential current is prevented by a separate algorithm...
Page 522 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions consecutive fulfillments of the condition. When the condition is not fulfilled, the counter is decreased (if >0). Also the fifth harmonic deblocking has a hysteresis and a counter which counts the required consecutive fulfillments of the condition. When the condition is not fulfilled, the counter is decreased (if >0).
Page 523 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-0E927DF9-5641-4CAE-B808-0B75EA09EA95 V3 EN Figure 261: Operation logic of the biased low stage The high currents passing through a protected object can be caused by the short circuits outside the protected area, the large currents fed by the transformer in motor start-up or the transformer inrush situations.
Page 524 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The stage can be blocked internally by the second or fifth harmonic restraint, or by special algorithms detecting inrush and current transformer saturation at external faults. When the operation of the biased low stage is blocked by the second harmonic blocking functionality, the BLKD2H output is activated.
Page 525 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The second turning point End section 2 can be set in the range of 100 percent to 500 percent. The slope of the differential function's operating characteristic curve varies in the different sections of the range. •...
Page 526 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-739E1789-778D-44BF-BD4A-6BD684BF041D V2 EN Figure 263: Setting range for biased low stage If the biasing current is small compared to the differential current of the phase angle between the winding 1 and winding 2 phase currents is close to zero (in a normal situation, the phase difference is 180 degrees), a fault has most likely occurred in the area protected by TR2PTDF.
Page 527 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-8B8EC6FC-DF75-4674-808B-7B4C68E9F3E8 V1 EN Figure 264: Operating characteristics of the protection. (LS) stands for the biased low stage and (HS) for the instantaneous high stage The OPERATE output is activated always when the OPR_HS output activates . The internal blocking signals of the differential function do not prevent the operate signal of the instantaneous differential current stage.
Page 528 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions however, reset the counters holding the blockings, so the blocking signals may return when these conditions are not valid anymore. External blocking functionality TR2PTDF has three inputs for blocking. • When the BLOCK input is active ("TRUE"), the operation of the function is blocked but measurement output signals are still updated.
Page 529 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions the phase shift and turns ratio. The numerical microprocessor based differential algorithm implemented in TR2PTDF compensates for both the turns ratio and the phase shift internally in the software. The differential current should theoretically be zero during normal load or external faults if the turns ratio and the phase shift are correctly compensated.
Page 530 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions this requires the interposing CTs to handle the vector group and/or ratio mismatch between the two windings/feeders. The accuracy limit factor for the interposing CT must fulfill the same requirements as the main CTs. Please note that the interposing CT imposes an additional burden to the main CTs.
Page 531 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-46FDF23A-7E78-4B17-A888-8501484AB57A V1 EN Figure 268: Protection of the power transformer feeding the frequency converter Transforming ratio correction of CTs The CT secondary currents often differ from the rated current at the rated load of the power transformer.
Page 532 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions CT ratio correction = (Equation 77) GUID-F5F45645-C809-4F99-B783-751C8CC822BF V1 EN nominal primary current of the CT After the CT ratio correction, the measured currents and corresponding setting values of TR2PTDF are expressed in multiples of the rated power transformer current I or percentage value of I The rated input current (1A or 5A) of the relay does not have to be same for the HV and the LV side.
Page 533 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions transformer inside the protected zone. The matching is based on phase shifting and a numerical delta connection in the protection relay. If the neutral of a star-connected power transformer is earthed, any earth fault in the network is perceived by the protection relay as a differential current.
Page 534 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Vector group of the Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Clock number Zro A Elimination transformer YNd11 Clk Num 11 Not needed Clk Num 0 Not needed Clk Num 2 Not needed Clk Num 4 Not needed Clk Num 6 Not needed...
Page 535 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Vector group of the Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Clock number Zro A Elimination transformer Clk Num 7 Not needed Zyn7 Clk Num 7 Not needed ZNyn7 Clk Num 7 HV side ZNy7 Clk Num 7 Not needed Zy11...
Page 536 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Vector group of the Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Clock number Zro A Elimination transformer Zzn2 Clk Num 2 Not needed Clk Num 4 Not needed ZNz4 Clk Num 4 Not needed ZNzn4 Clk Num 4 Not needed Zzn4...
Page 537 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Vector group of the Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Clock number Zro A Elimination transformer YNyn10 Clk Num 10 Not needed Yyn10 Clk Num 10 Not needed Clk Num 1 Not needed YNd1 Clk Num 1 Not needed Clk Num 5...
Page 538 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Vector group of the Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Clock number Zro A Elimination transformer Yzn11 Clk Num 11 Not needed Clk Num 1 Not needed Zyn1 Clk Num 1 Not needed ZNyn1 Clk Num 1 HV side ZNy1...
Page 539 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-5ACBF127-85A3-4E5E-A130-9F7206A2DB4C V1 EN Figure 270: Low voltage test arrangement. The three-phase low voltage source can be the station service transformer. The Tapped winding control setting parameter has to be set to “Not in use” to make sure that the monitored current values are not scaled by the automatic adaptation to the tap changer position.
Page 540 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions is set to "Clk num 0", the resulting connection group "Yd0" is not a supported combination. All the non-supported combinations of Winding 1 type, Winding 2 type and Clock number settings result in the default connection group compensation that is "Yy0".
Page 541 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The CT burden can grow considerably at the rated current 5A. The actual burden of the current transformer decreases at the rated current of 1A while the repeatability simultaneously improves. At faults occurring in the protected area, the currents may be very high compared to the rated currents of the current transformers.
Page 542 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions fault currents and thermal stress and therefore re-energizing is not preferred in this case. Thus, the remanence can be neglected. The maximum through-going fault current Ik is typically 10 I for a substation main transformer. At a short circuit fault close to the supply transformer, the DC time constant (T ) of the fault current is almost the same as that of the transformer, the typical value being 100 ms.
Page 543 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions • a CT with a higher rated burden S can be chosen (which also means a higher rated accuracy limit F • a CT with a higher nominal primary current I (but the same rated burden) can be chosen Example 2 Assuming that the actions according to alternative two above are taken in order to...
Page 544 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-53F7DCB6-58B8-418C-AB83-805B4B0DCCAE V3 EN Figure 271: Connection example of current transformers of Type 1 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 545 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-24C391DC-D767-4848-AE98-FE33C1548DEE V2 EN Figure 272: Alternative connection example of current transformers of Type 1 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 546 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-66D375DD-BF49-43C5-A7B5-BFA2BEAD035C V3 EN Figure 273: Connection of current transformers of Type 2 and example of the currents during an external fault 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 547 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-5E0D15BA-ADA9-4FE0-A85D-5C6E86D7E32B V2 EN Figure 274: Alternative connection example of current transformers of Type 2 The CT secondary currents often differ from the rated current at the rated load of the power transformer. The CT transforming ratios can be corrected on both sides of the power transformer with the CT ratio Cor Wnd 1 and CT ratio Cor Wnd 2 settings.
Page 548 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block BLK_OPR_LS BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks operate outputs from biased stage BLK_OPR_HS BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks operate outputs from instantaneous stage TAP_POS INT8 Tap position indication Table 485: TR2PTDF Output signals Name Type Description...
Page 549 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 488: TR2PTDF Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off/On 5=off CT connection type 1=Type 1 1=Type 1 CT connection type. Determined by the 2=Type 2 directions of the connected current transformers Winding 1 type...
Page 550 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.3.2.9 Monitored data Table 490: TR2PTDF Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description OPR_A BOOLEAN 0=False Operate phase A 1=True OPR_B BOOLEAN 0=False Operate phase B 1=True OPR_C BOOLEAN 0=False Operate phase C 1=True BLKD2H_A BOOLEAN...
Page 551 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description I_AMPL_A1 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Connection group compensated primary current phase A I_AMPL_B1 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Connection group compensated primary current phase B I_AMPL_C1 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Connection group compensated primary current phase C I_AMPL_A2 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00...
Page 552 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description I_ANGL_B1_B2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Current phase angle diff between winding 1 and 2, phase B I_ANGL_C1_C2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Current phase angle diff between winding 1 and 2, phase C I_5H_RAT_A FLOAT32 0.00...1.00...
Page 553 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.3.2.11 Technical revision history Table 492: TR2PTDF Technical revision history Technical revision Change 5th harmonic and waveform blockings taken to event data set Slope section 3 . Added input Added setting TAP_POS 4.3.3 Numerical stabilized low-impedance restricted earth-fault protection LREFPNDF 4.3.3.1 Identification...
Page 554 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.3.3.4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". The operation of LREFPNDF can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
Page 555 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions operation criteria to maintain selectivity. A correct value for CT connection type is determined by the connection polarities of the current transformer. The current transformer ratio mismatch between the phase current transformer and neutral current transformer (residual current in the analog input settings) is taken into account by the function with the properly set analog input setting values.
Page 556 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-552423CA-6FE9-4F69-8341-FFE0FF1943D4 V1 EN Figure 278: Setting range of the operating characteristics for the stabilized differential current principle of the earth-fault protection function The Operate value setting is used for defining the characteristics of the function. The differential current value required for tripping is constant at the stabilizing current values 0.0 <...
Page 557 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The second harmonic blocking is disabled when Restraint mode is set to "None" and enabled when set to "Harmonic2". Timer Once activated, the Timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Minimum operate time, the OPERATE output is activated.
Page 558 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions current is provided to the differential element to detect the earth fault in the transformer winding based on the numerical stabilized differential current principle. Connection of current transformers The connections of the primary current transformers are designated as "Type 1" and "Type 2".
Page 559 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-AF8C4517-178F-4421-8B88-675E30B2C1A1 V1 EN Figure 280: Connection of the current transformers of Type 1. The connected phase currents and the neutral current have opposite directions at an external earth-fault situation. Both earthings are outside the area to be protected.
Page 560 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-7F9EBC22-8976-4F9C-8CE8-3BEAA234012A V1 EN Figure 282: Connection of the current transformers of Type 2. The phase currents and the neutral current have equal directions at an external earth- fault situation. Phase earthing is outside and neutral earthing is inside the area to be protected.
Page 561 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions zone of protection a = 0 b = 0 b = 0 c = 0 For external fault Reference is Neutral Current Operate for Restrain for internal fault external fault GUID-FAC5E4AD-A4A7-4D39-9EAC-C380EA33CB78 V2 EN Figure 283: Current flow in all the CTs for an external fault zone of protection...
Page 562 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions LREFPNDF does not respond to phase-to-phase faults either, as in this case the fault current flows between the two line CTs and so the neutral CT does not experience this fault current. Blocking based on the second harmonic of the neutral current The transformer magnetizing inrush currents occur when the transformer is energized after a period of de-energization.
Page 563 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.3.3.7 Settings Table 495: LREFPNDF Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operate value 5.0...50.0 Operate value Table 496: LREFPNDF Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Minimum operate time 40...300000 Minimum operate time Restraint mode...
Page 564 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.3.3.9 Technical data Table 500: LREFPNDF Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 Hz ±2.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x I Minimum Typical Maximum 1)2) Start time...
Page 565 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.3.4.3 Functionality The high-impedance based restricted earth-fault protection function HREFPDIF is used for the restricted earth-fault protection of generators and power transformers. The function starts when the differential neutral current exceeds the set limit. HREFPDIF operates with the DT characteristic.
Page 566 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting Configuration/System/ Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the IED program.
Page 567 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Stabilizing Resistor High impedance protection (HREFPDIF) GUID-367BDBC9-D2E8-48D3-B98F-623F7CD70D99 V3 EN Figure 287: Connection scheme for the restricted earth-fault protection according to the high-impedance principle High-impedance principle High-impedance principle is stable for all types of faults outside the zone of protection.
Page 568 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-80DC5CFE-118C-4C5C-A15F-13DCB1708C0E V1 EN Figure 288: High-impedance principle The stability of the protection is based on the use of the stabilizing resistor (Rs) and the fact that the impedance of the CT secondary quickly decreases as the CT saturates. The magnetization reactance of a fully saturated CT goes to zero and the impedance is formed only by the resistance of the winding (R ) and lead resistance (R...
Page 569 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions At internal fault, the secondary circuit voltage can easily exceed the isolation voltage of the CTs, connection wires and IED. To limit this voltage, a voltage-dependent resistor VDR is used as shown in Figure 288.
Page 570 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions recommended that all current transformers have an equal burden and characteristics and are of same type, preferably from the same manufacturing batch, that is, an identical construction should be used. If the CT characteristics and burden values are not equal, calculation for each branch in the scheme should be done separately and the worst-case result is then used.
Page 571 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions (Equation 87) GUID-EA4FE2BC-4E93-4093-BD14-F20A4F33AEF2 V1 EN the resistance of the stabilizing resistor the stabilizing voltage of the IED the value of the Operate value setting in secondary amps. The stabilizing resistor should be capable to dissipate high energy within a very short time;...
Page 572 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions In principle, the highest through-fault should be known. However, when the necessary data are not available, approximates can be used: • Small power transformers: I = 16 x I (corresponds to z = 6% and kmax infinite grid) •...
Page 573 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The need for the VDR depends on certain conditions. First, voltage U , ignoring the CT saturation during the fault, is calculated with the equation × ≈ × (Equation 91) GUID-CB54C30A-C69D-4C59-B9B3-44530319D1CE V1 EN the maximum fault current inside the zone, in primary amps kmaxin the turns ration of the CT the internal resistance of the CT in ohms...
Page 574 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.3.4.8 Setting examples Example 1 GUID-AB960DE4-4DD2-4312-9921-0D6E7CD001AA V1 EN Figure 290: Restricted earth-fault protection of a transformer The data for the protected power transformer are: = 20 MVA = 11 kV The longest distance of the secondary circuit is 50 m (the whole loop is 100 m) and the area of the cross section is 10 mm / (√3 ·...
Page 575 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 12600 0 26 0 18 × ≈ GUID-7AA079B9-4E11-48BD-A474-B7A06BA3976B V1 EN According to the criterion, the value of U should be 2 · U = 2 · 23 V = 46 V. It depends on if the stability of the scheme is achieved with U = 40 V.
Page 576 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Example 2a GUID-787D9DE6-961E-454A-B97A-FAFC6F9701F0 V1 EN Figure 291: Restricted earth-fault protection of a generator In the protected generator: = 8 MVA = 6 kV. = 770 A = 6 · I = 6 · 770 A = 4620 A kmax In this example, the CT type is KOFD 12 A 21 with: = 1000 A (value given by the manufacturer).
Page 577 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The required knee-point voltage can be calculated using Equation = 2 · ( 4620 A / 1000 ) · ( 15.3 + 1.46 ) ≈ 155 V. The value 155 V is lower than the value 323 V, which means that the value of U high enough.
Page 578 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 503: HREFPDIF Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start 4.3.4.10 Settings Table 504: HREFPDIF Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operate value 1.0...50.0 Low operate value, percentage of the nominal current Minimum operate time 40...300000...
Page 579 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.3.4.12 Technical data Table 508: HREFPDIF Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 Hz ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × I Minimum Typical Maximum 1)2) Start time...
Page 580 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.3.5.2 Function block GUID-A8C4ADB7-8892-422F-8B00-873C47A66A3E V1 EN Figure 292: Function block 4.3.5.3 Functionality The high-impedance differential protection function HIxPDIF is a general differential protection. It provides a phase-segregated short circuit protection for the busbar. However, the function can also be used for providing generator, motor, transformer and reactor protection.
Page 581 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-89207322-ADEC-4927-9402-72C112CC7C7C V2 EN Figure 293: Functional module diagram The module diagram illustrates all the phases of the function. Functionality for phases A, B and C is identical. All three phases have independent settings. Level detector The module compares differential currents I_A calculated by the peak-to-peak measurement mode to the set Operate value.
Page 582 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Timer calculates the start duration START_DUR value, which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is available in the Monitored data view. The activation of the BLOCK input resets Timer and deactivates the START and OPERATE outputs.
Page 583 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-1AB5D686-3B9C-413F-9D0A-215BFCA224B4 V1 EN Figure 294: Phase-segregated bus differential protection based on high- impedance principle CT secondary winding resistances (R ) and connection wire resistances (R /2) are also shown in Figure 295. Figure 295 demonstrates a simplified circuit consisting only of one incoming and outgoing feeder.
Page 584 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-AE532349-F4F6-4FF9-8A98-0C862162E208 V1 EN Figure 295: Equivalent circuit when there is no fault or CT saturation When there is no fault, the CT secondary currents and their emf voltages, E and E are opposite and the protection relay measuring branch has no voltage or current. If an in-zone fault occurs, the secondary currents have the same direction.
Page 585 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Figure 297 shows CT saturation at a through-fault, that is, out-of-zone, situation. The magnetization impedance of a saturated CT is almost zero. The saturated CT winding can be presented as a short circuit. When one CT is saturated, the current of the non- saturated CT follows two paths, one through the protection relay measuring branch + relay) and the other through the saturated CT (R The protection relay must not operate during the saturation.
Page 586 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-D8F15382-5E3F-4371-B2AD-936D72941803 V1 EN Figure 298: Secondary waveform of a saturated CT The secondary circuit voltage can easily exceed the isolation voltage of the CTs, connection wires and the protection relay because of the stabilizing resistance and CT saturation.
Page 587 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-C5514DFD-9FE8-4BF7-93D8-14186867D0F8 V1 EN Figure 299: Phase-segregated single busbar protection employing high- impedance differential protection Figure 300 shows an example for a system consisting of two busbar section coupled with a bus coupler. Each busbar section consists of two feeders and both sections are provided with a separate differential protection to form different zones.
Page 588 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions in any busbar section, the difference current is no longer zero and the protection operates. GUID-5F359CB5-4F4F-4803-B5B5-6859F1CB17F5 V1 EN Figure 300: Differential protection on busbar with bus coupler (Single-phase representation) 4.3.5.6 Example calculations for busbar high-impedance differential protection The protected object in the example for busbar differential protection is a single-bus system with two zones of protection.
Page 589 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-A96D78E5-0D17-4CE7-818F-6CB804C7078D V1 EN Figure 301: Example for busbar differential protection Bus data: 20 kV 2000 A 25 kA kmax 10 feeders per protected zone including bus coupler and incomer. CT data is assumed to be: 2000/1 A 15.75 Ω...
Page 590 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The stabilizing voltage is calculated using the formula: 25000 15 75 209 37 Ω Ω ≈ 2000 (Equation 93) GUID-3911986B-6B0A-4586-BDB7-E7F685E8FF0A V1 EN In this case, the requirement for the current transformer knee point voltage is fulfilled because U >...
Page 591 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Based on Equation 101 Equation 102, the need for voltage-dependent resistor is checked. 25000 5900 15 75 1 00 74 0 Ω Ω Ω ≈ 2000 (Equation 101) GUID-1B91F8BF-62F5-4FE6-A4B4-4FE3AA3DB969 V1 EN ˘ 2 436 74000 16 0 = ⋅...
Page 592 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 513: HIAPDIF Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start Table 514: HIBPDIF Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start Table 515: HICPDIF Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE...
Page 593 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 520: HIBPDIF Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On 5=off Table 521: HIBPDIF Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time...
Page 594 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 526: HIBPDIF Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / operate time HIBPDIF Enum 1=on Status 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off Table 527: HICPDIF Monitored data Name Type Values (Range)
Page 595 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.3.6 High-impedance/flux-balance based differential protection for motors MHZPDIF 4.3.6.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number High-impedance/flux-balance based MHZPDIF 3dIHi>M 87MH differential protection for motors 4.3.6.2 Function block GUID-3FADFABC-DDB3-471F-B542-94A885482F49 V1 EN Figure 302: Function block...
Page 596 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Level detector This module compares the three-phase differential currents to the set Operate value. If any of the differential currents ID_A, ID_B or ID_C exceeds the set Operate value, the Level detector module sends an enable signal to the Timer module to start the definite timer (DT).
Page 597 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-0828F1EE-EA49-467C-9DAA-1029A5E34480 V1 EN Figure 304: Three-phase differential protection for motors based on high- impedance principle In case of an internal fault, the fault current cannot circulate through the CTs. It flows through the measuring branch, and the protection operates. A partial CT saturation can occur in case of an internal fault, but the undistorted part of the current waveform causes the protection to operate.
Page 598 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions protection, any flashover in the CT secondary circuits or any other part of the scheme can prevent the correct operation of MHZPDIF. Flux-balancing principle In a measuring configuration for the three-phase differential currents according to the flux-balancing principle, no stabilizing resistors are needed.
Page 599 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.3.6.6 Recommendations for current transformers High-impedance principle The sensitivity and reliability of the protection depend on the characteristics of the current transformers. The CTs must have an identical transformation ratio. It is recommended that all current transformers have an equal burden and characteristics and that they are of the same type.
Page 600 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The current transformers must be able to force enough current to operate the relay through the differential circuit during a fault condition inside the protection zone. To ensure this, the knee point voltage U should be at least twice higher than the stabilizing voltage U The required knee point voltage U...
Page 601 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions voltage dependent resistor. The value of the primary current I at which the prim protection relay operates at certain setting can be calculated using Equation 109. = ⋅ ⋅ prim (Equation 109) GUID-7F6337D5-7AB1-427D-9F05-BC7EE6B1EC71 V1 EN The magnetizing current per current transformer at U voltage The primary current level at which the protection is to start...
Page 602 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The formulas are based on choosing the CTs according to Equation which results an absolute stable scheme. In some cases, it is possible to achieve stability with knee point voltages lower than the voltage stated in the formulas. However, the network conditions have to be known well enough to ensure the stability.
Page 603 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 12600 17325 ⋅ Ω = (Equation 113) GUID-5CFBCB0D-AD77-40FE-BAAE-ADB7F4433814 V1 EN ˘ 2 2 81 17325 81 3 34 ⋅ ⋅ − ≈ (Equation 114) GUID-36CB9591-47BB-4FFD-A6B0-2088AF2B9C18 V1 EN As the peak voltage ȗ = 3.2 kV, VDR must be used. In some cases, VDR can be avoided if R is smaller.
Page 604 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-D22CF70E-4AE7-49A2-BD27-9F69FBDBBAAD V1 EN Figure 308: Example calculation for high-impedance differential protection (only one phase is presented in detail) The length of the secondary circuit loop is 200 m and the area of the cross-section is 2.5 mm .
Page 605 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The setting current I should be at the minimum of the sum of the magnetizing currents of all connected CTs to obtain adequate protection stability. 2 8 5 = ⋅ ≈ (Equation 119) GUID-7180B5B4-9EC0-47E7-954C-AD680C949C49 V1 EN The resistance of the stabilizing resistor is calculated based on Equation 107.
Page 606 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The sensitivity of the protection can be re-calculated taking into account the leakage current through the varistor as per Equation 109. 1000 0 020 2 0 0085 0 002 ⋅ + ⋅ ≈ prim (Equation 127) GUID-15CE21B4-EF82-4C43-96F0-4B02836B7A40 V1 EN 4.3.6.8...
Page 607 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.3.6.10 Monitored data Table 537: MHZPDIF Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / operate time ID_A FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Differential current phase ID_B FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Differential current phase ID_C FLOAT32 0.00...80.00...
Page 608 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Unbalance protection 4.4.1 Negative-sequence overcurrent protection NSPTOC 4.4.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Negative-sequence overcurrent NSPTOC I2> protection 4.4.1.2 Function block A070758 V1 EN Figure 309: Function block 4.4.1.3 Functionality...
Page 609 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The operation of NSPTOC can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections. A070660 V1 EN Figure 310: Functional module diagram Level detector The measured negative-sequence current is compared to the set Start value. If the measured value exceeds the set Start value, the level detector activates the timer module.
Page 610 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The "Inverse reset" selection is only supported with ANSI or user programmable types of the IDMT operating curves. If another operating curve type is selected, an immediate reset occurs during the drop-off situation. The setting Time multiplier is used for scaling the IDMT operate and reset times. The setting parameter Minimum operate time defines the minimum desired operate time for IDMT.
Page 611 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions occurs on the wye-connected side of the power transformer, negative sequence current quantities appear on the delta-connected side of the power transformer. The most common application for the negative sequence overcurrent protection is probably rotating machines, where negative sequence current quantities indicate unbalanced loading conditions (unsymmetrical voltages).
Page 612 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.4.1.7 Settings Table 541: NSPTOC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 0.01...5.00 0.01 0.30 Start value Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 Multiplier for scaling the start value Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00...
Page 613 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 544: NSPTOC Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Minimum operate time 20...60000 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves Reset delay time 0...60000 Reset delay time 4.4.1.8 Monitored data Table 545: NSPTOC Monitored data Name...
Page 614 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.4.1.10 Technical revision history Table 547: NSPTOC Technical revision history Technical revision Change Minimum and default values changed to 40 ms for Operate delay time setting Time Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for the multiplier setting Internal improvement Internal Improvements...
Page 615 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The operation of PDNSPTOC can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections. A070687 V2 EN Figure 312: Functional module diagram The I module calculates the ratio of the negative and positive sequence current.
Page 616 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions protection relay's program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected with the global setting Blocking mode. The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers" mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value, but the OPERATE output is not deactivated when blocking is activated.
Page 617 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions IECA070698 V1 EN Figure 314: Three-phase current quantities during the broken conductor fault in phase A with the ratio of negative-sequence and positive-sequence currents 4.4.2.6 Signals Table 548: PDNSPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Positive sequence current...
Page 618 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 551: PDNSPTOC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On 5=off Table 552: PDNSPTOC Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time...
Page 619 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.4.2.10 Technical revision history Table 555: PDNSPTOC Technical revision history Technical revision Change Internal improvement Internal improvement Internal improvement 4.4.3 Phase reversal protection PREVPTOC 4.4.3.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number...
Page 620 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The operation of PREVPTOC can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections. GUID-F0B4B5EF-8B3C-4967-9818-24DACE686FC8 V1 EN Figure 316: Functional module diagram Level detector The level detector compares the negative-sequence current to the set Start value. If the value exceeds the set Start value, the level detector sends an enabling signal to the timer module.
Page 621 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.4.3.6 Signals Table 556: PREVPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Negative sequence current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode Table 557: PREVPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START...
Page 622 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.4.3.9 Technical data Table 561: PREVPTOC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 Hz ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × I Minimum Typical Maximum 1)2) Start time...
Page 623 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.4.4.3 Functionality The negative-sequence overcurrent protection for machines function MNSPTOC protects electric motors from phase unbalance. A small voltage unbalance can produce a large negative-sequence current flow in the motor. For example, a 5 percent voltage unbalance produces a stator negative-sequence current of 30 percent of the full load current, which can severely heat the motor.
Page 624 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions For the IDMT curves, it is possible to define minimum and maximum operate times with the Minimum operate time and Maximum operate time settings. The Machine time Mult setting parameter corresponds to the machine constant, equal to the I constant of the machine, as stated by the machine manufacturer.
Page 625 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Inv. curve A The inverse time equation for curve type A is:       (Equation 129) GUID-D8A4A304-6C63-4BA4-BAEA-E7891504557A V1 EN t[s] Operate time in seconds Machine time Mult Negative-sequence current Rated current 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 626 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-F0214060-11E8-42F7-B3B9-AF5AC08A1079 V1 EN Figure 319: MNSPTOC Inverse Curve A If the negative sequence current drops below the Start value setting, the reset time is defined as:   = ×     (Equation 130) GUID-8BE4B6AC-FB61-4D30-B77B-3E599D5BAE81 V1 EN t[s] Reset time in seconds...
Page 627 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions When the reset period is initiated, the time for which START has been active is saved. If the fault reoccurs, that is, the negative-sequence current rises above the set value during the reset period, the operate calculations are continued using the saved values. If the reset period elapses without a fault being detected, the operate timer is reset and the saved values of start time and integration are cleared.
Page 628 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-C536DD76-70FA-49CF-9D0B-F14CA76873D0 V1 EN Figure 320: MNSPTOC Inverse Curve B If the fault disappears, the negative-sequence current drops below the Start value setting and the START output is deactivated. The function does not reset instantaneously. Resetting depends on the equation or the Cooling time setting. The timer is reset in two ways: •...
Page 629 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions depends on the value of the negative-sequence current. If the sum reaches zero without a fault being detected, the accumulation stops and the timer is reset. • If the reset time set through the Cooling time setting elapses without a fault being detected, the timer is reset.
Page 630 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 564: MNSPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start BLK_RESTART BOOLEAN Overheated machine reconnection blocking 4.4.4.8 Settings Table 565: MNSPTOC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 0.01...0.50...
Page 631 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.4.4.9 Monitored data Table 568: MNSPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / operate time T_ENARESTART INT32 0...10000 Estimated time to reset of block restart MNSPTOC Enum 1=on...
Page 632 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Voltage protection 4.5.1 Three-phase overvoltage protection PHPTOV 4.5.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Three-phase overvoltage protection PHPTOV 3U> 4.5.1.2 Function block GUID-871D07D7-B690-48FD-8EA1-73A7169AE8BD V2 EN Figure 321: Function block 4.5.1.3 Functionality...
Page 633 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Timer U_A_AB Phase Level U_B_BC selection OPERATE detector U_C_CA logic START Blocking BLOCK logic GUID-D71B1772-3503-4150-B3FE-6FFD92DE5DB7 V2 EN Figure 322: Functional module diagram Level detector The fundamental frequency component of the measured three-phase voltages are compared phase-wise to the set value of the Start value setting.
Page 634 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions When the operation timer has reached the value set by Operate delay time in the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the IDMT, the OPERATE output is activated. When the user-programmable IDMT curve is selected, the operate time characteristics are defined by the parameters Curve parameter A, Curve parameter B, Curve parameter C, Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E.
Page 635 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-543D302D-0B91-4692-BAFE-4AB7B8BA08B6 V1 EN Figure 323: Behavior of different IDMT reset modes. Operate signal is based on settings Type of reset curve = “Def time reset” and Type of time reset= “Freeze Op timer”. The effect of other reset modes is also presented The Time multiplier setting is used for scaling the IDMT operate times.
Page 636 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions see the IDMT curves for overvoltage protection section in this manual. The Timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is available in the Monitored data view.
Page 637 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The power frequency overvoltage may occur in the network due to contingencies such • The defective operation of the automatic voltage regulator when the generator is in isolated operation. • Operation under manual control with the voltage regulator out of service. A sudden variation of load, in particular the reactive power component, gives rise to a substantial change in voltage because of the inherent large voltage regulation of a typical alternator.
Page 638 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.5.1.8 Settings Table 575: PHPTOV Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 0.05...1.60 0.01 1.10 Start value Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves Operate delay time 40...300000 Operate delay time Operating curve type...
Page 639 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 578: PHPTOV Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Minimum operate time 40...60000 Minimum operate time for IDMT curves Reset delay time 0...60000 Reset delay time Curve Sat Relative 0.0...10.0 Tuning parameter to avoid curve discontinuities...
Page 640 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.5.1.11 Technical revision history Table 581: PHPTOV Technical revision history Technical revision Change Time Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for the multiplier setting. Curve Sat relative max range widened from 3.0 to 10.0 % and default value changed from 2.0 to 0.0 %.
Page 641 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The operation of PHAPTOV can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections. GUID-FE834262-D5F0-49DC-9389-99A5B2579336 V1 EN Figure 325: Functional module diagram Level detector The fundamental frequency component of the measured voltage is compared phase- wise to the set value of the Start value setting.
Page 642 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions When the user-programmable IDMT curve is selected, the operate time characteristics are defined by the parameters Curve parameter A, Curve parameter B, Curve parameter C, Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E. If a drop-off situation occurs, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the operation delay is exceeded, the reset state is activated.
Page 643 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Example GUID-543D302D-0B91-4692-BAFE-4AB7B8BA08B6 V1 EN Figure 326: Behavior of different IDMT reset modes Figure 326 shows the operate signal based on settings Type of reset curve = “Def time reset” and Type of time reset = “Freeze Op timer”. The effect of other reset modes is also presented.
Page 644 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions the value of the Minimum operate time setting. For more information, see the IDMT curves for overcurrent protection section in this manual. The Timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operate time. The value is available in the Monitored data view.
Page 645 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The power frequency overvoltage may occur in the network due to contingencies such • Defective operation of the automatic voltage regulator when the generator is in isolated operation. • Operation under manual control with the voltage regulator out of service. A sudden variation of load, in particular the reactive power component, gives rise to a substantial change in voltage because of the large voltage regulation inherent in a typical alternator.
Page 646 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 587: PHAPTOV Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type 2=Def time reset Type of time reset 1=Freeze Op timer 1=Freeze Op timer Selection of time reset 2=Decrease Op...
Page 647 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.5.2.10 Technical data Table 591: PHAPTOV Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured voltage: f ±2 Hz ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × U Minimum Typical Maximum 1)2) Start time...
Page 648 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions subjected to service under low voltage conditions. PHPTUV includes a settable value for the detection of undervoltage either in a single phase, two phases or three phases. The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs, timer or the function itself, if desired.
Page 649 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions autoreclose sequence. The low-level blocking is activated by default (Enable block value is set to "True") and the blocking level can be set with the Voltage block value setting. Phase selection logic If the fault criteria are fulfilled in the level detector, the phase selection logic detects the phase or phases in which the fault level is detected.
Page 650 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 592: Reset time functionality when IDMT operation time curve selected Reset functionality Setting Type of Setting Type of time Setting Reset delay reset curve reset time Instantaneous Operation timer is “Immediate” Setting has no Setting has no reset “Reset...
Page 651 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-17E4650D-ADFD-408E-B699-00CBA1E934B8 V1 EN Figure 329: Behavior of different IDMT reset modes. Operate signal is based on settings Type of reset curve = “Def time reset” and Type of time reset= “Freeze Op timer”. The effect of other reset modes is also presented The Time multiplier setting is used for scaling the IDMT operate times.
Page 652 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The Timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is available in the Monitored data view. Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration/System/ Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode.
Page 653 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions PHPTUV can be used to disconnect from the network devices, such as electric motors, which are damaged when subjected to service under low voltage conditions. PHPTUV deals with low voltage conditions at power system frequency. Low voltage conditions can be caused by: •...
Page 654 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 597: PHPTUV Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type 2=Def time reset Type of time reset 1=Freeze Op timer 1=Freeze Op timer Selection of time reset 2=Decrease Op...
Page 655 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.5.3.9 Monitored data Table 600: PHPTUV Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / operate time PHPTUV Enum 1=on Status 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 4.5.3.10 Technical data Table 601: PHPTUV Technical data Characteristic...
Page 656 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.5.4 Single-phase undervoltage protection PHAPTUV 4.5.4.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Single-phase undervoltage protection, PHAPTUV U_A< 27_A secondary side 4.5.4.2 Function block GUID-D3827813-F922-45E5-9BCA-161B5006F543 V1 EN Figure 330: Function block 4.5.4.3 Functionality...
Page 657 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Level detector The fundamental frequency component of the measured single-phase voltage is compared phase-wise to the set value of the Start value setting. If the measured value is lower than the set value of the Start value setting, the Llevel detector activates the Timer module.
Page 658 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions drop-off situation exceeds the set Reset delay time, the Timer is reset and the START output is deactivated. When the IDMT operation time curve is selected, the functionality of the Timer in the drop-off state depends on the combination of the Type of reset curve, Type of time reset and Reset delay time settings.
Page 659 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-17E4650D-ADFD-408E-B699-00CBA1E934B8 V1 EN Figure 332: Behavior of different IDMT reset modes Figure 332 shows the operate signal based on settings Type of reset curve = “Def time reset” and Type of time reset= “Freeze Op timer”. The effect of other reset modes is also presented.
Page 660 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The Timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operate time. The value is available in the Monitored data view. Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking functionality. The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting Configuration/System/ Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode.
Page 661 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions PHAPTUV can be used to disconnect damaged devices from the network. These are, for example, electric motors, which are damaged when subjected to service under low voltage conditions. PHPTUV deals with low voltage conditions at power system frequency.
Page 662 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 608: PHAPTUV Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type 2=Def time reset Type of time reset 1=Freeze Op timer 1=Freeze Op timer Selection of time reset 2=Decrease Op...
Page 663 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.5.4.10 Technical data Table 612: PHAPTUV Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured voltage: f ±2 Hz ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × U Minimum Typical Maximum 1)2) Start time...
Page 664 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The function starts when the residual voltage exceeds the set limit. ROVPTOV operates with the definite time (DT) characteristic. The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs, the definite timer or the function itself, if desired. 4.5.5.4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
Page 665 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions If "Calculated Uo" is selected, the nominal value of residual voltage is always phase-to-phase voltage. Thus, the valid maximum setting for residual voltage Start value is 0.577 × Un. The calculated Uo requires that all three phase-to-earth voltages are connected to the protection relay.
Page 666 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions component. Therefore, this function is often used as a backup protection or as a release signal for the feeder earth-fault protection. The protection can also be used for the earth-fault protection of generators and motors and for the unbalance protection of capacitor banks.
Page 667 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.5.5.8 Monitored data Table 618: ROVPTOV Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / operate time ROVPTOV Enum 1=on Status 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 4.5.5.9 Technical data Table 619: ROVPTOV Technical data Characteristic...
Page 668 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.5.6 Negative-sequence overvoltage protection NSPTOV 4.5.6.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Negative-sequence overvoltage NSPTOV U2> 47O- protection 4.5.6.2 Function block GUID-F94BCCE8-841F-405C-B659-3EF26F959557 V1 EN Figure 335: Function block 4.5.6.3 Functionality The negative-sequence overvoltage protection function NSPTOV is used to detect...
Page 669 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Level detector The calculated negative-sequence voltage is compared to the set Start value setting. If the value exceeds the set Start value, the level detector enables the timer. Timer Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is according to DT.
Page 670 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions separately. Alternatively, the protection can be implemented with the NSPTOV function, monitoring the voltage unbalance of the busbar. If the machines have an unbalance protection of their own, the NSPTOV operation can be applied as a backup protection or it can be used as an alarm. The latter can be applied when it is not required to trip loads tolerating voltage unbalance better than the rotating machines.
Page 671 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 625: NSPTOV Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0...60000 Reset delay time 4.5.6.8 Monitored data Table 626: NSPTOV Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32...
Page 672 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.5.7 Positive-sequence undervoltage protection PSPTUV 4.5.7.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Positive-sequence undervoltage PSPTUV U1< 47U+ protection 4.5.7.2 Function block GUID-24EBDE8B-E1FE-47B0-878B-EBEC13A27CAC V1 EN Figure 337: Function block 4.5.7.3 Functionality The positive-sequence undervoltage protection function PSPTUV is used to detect...
Page 673 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-F1E58B1E-03CB-4A3C-BD1B-F809420397ED V1 EN Figure 338: Functional module diagram. U is used for representing positive phase sequence voltage. Level detector The calculated positive-sequence voltage is compared to the set Start value setting. If the value drops below the set Start value, the level detector enables the timer. The Relative hysteresis setting can be used for preventing unnecessary oscillations if the input signal slightly varies from the Start value setting.
Page 674 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.5.7.5 Application PSPTUV can be applied for protecting a power station used for embedded generation when network faults like short circuits or phase-to-earth faults in a transmission or a distribution line cause a potentially dangerous situations for the power station. A network fault can be dangerous for the power station for various reasons.
Page 675 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 630: PSPTUV Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start 4.5.7.7 Settings Table 631: PSPTUV Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 0.010...1.200 0.001 0.500 Start value Operate delay time 40...120000...
Page 676 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.5.7.9 Technical data Table 636: PSPTUV Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured voltage: f ±2 Hz ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × U Minimum Typical Maximum 1)2) Start time...
Page 677 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.5.8.2 Function block GUID-CCC25550-F3F8-4CF5-8AF3-424CAB1B8D3B V1 EN Figure 339: Function block 4.5.8.3 Functionality The overexcitation protection function OEPVPH is used to protect generators and power transformers against an excessive flux density and saturation of the magnetic core.
Page 678 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions U/f calculation This module calculates the U/f ratio, that is, the excitation level from the internal induced voltage (E) and frequency. The actual measured voltage (U ) deviates from the internal induced voltage (E), a value the equipment has to withstand. This voltage compensation is based on the load current (I ) and the leakage reactance (X ) of the...
Page 679 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions If the leakage reactance of the protected equipment is unknown or if the measured voltage (U ) is to be used in the excitation level calculation, then by setting the leakage reactance value to zero the calculated induced voltage (E) is equal to the measured voltage.
Page 680 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions time delay of Reset delay time for the DT characteristics. For the IDMT curves, the reset operation is as described in the Timer characteristics chapter. For the IDMT curves, it is possible to define the maximum and minimum operating times via the Minimum operate time and Maximum operate time settings.
Page 681 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Overexcitation inverse definite minimum time curve (IDMT) In the inverse time modes, the operate time depends on the momentary value of the excitation: the higher the excitation level, the shorter the operate time. The operate time calculation or integration starts immediately when the excitation level exceeds the set Start value and the START output is activated.
Page 682 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Inverse time counter Operate level 100% Drop-off START Reset time START START resets reset time GUID-C6AAFC57-08D7-4AF9-99D6-6153D9A7D0DC V1 EN Figure 341: An example of a delayed reset in the inverse time characteristics. When the start becomes active during the reset period, the operate time counter continues from the level corresponding to the drop-off (reset time = 0.50 ·...
Page 683 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-BD1205DC-1794-4F64-A950-6199C54DB7B1 V1 EN Figure 342: Operating time curves for the overexcitation IDMT curve ("OvExt IDMT Crv1") for parameters a = 2.5, b = 115.0 and c = 4.886 Overexcitation IDMT curve 4 The base equation for the IDMT curve "OvExt IDMT Crv4" is: 0 18 1000 −...
Page 684 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-6FC7624E-7E13-4645-8943-0FDFBAA1D184 V1 EN Figure 343: Operating time curves for the overexcitation IDMT curve 4 ("OvExt IDMT Crv4") for different values of the Time multiplier setting when the Constant delay is 800 milliseconds The activation of the OPERATE output activates the BLK_RESTART output. For the IDMT characteristic "OvExt IDMT Crv4", the deactivation of the OPERATE output activates the cooling timer.
Page 685 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-7626C453-0A4C-45D1-9850-AFE90F88D0CB V1 EN Figure 344: Example of an inverse time counter operation if START occurs when is inactive while COOL_ACTIVE is active. The Restart BLK_RESTART Ena level setting is considered to be 40 percent. 4.5.8.6 Application If the laminated core of a power transformer or generator is subjected to a magnetic...
Page 686 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Overexcitation protection for the transformer is generally provided by the generator overexcitation protection, which uses the VTs connected to the generator terminals. The curves that define the generator and transformer V/Hz limits must be coordinated properly to protect both equipment.
Page 687 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The internal induced voltage E of the machine is calculated. − ⋅ leak (Equation 138) GUID-7277AB82-6BAD-4849-A4CC-18C6EEEB4AC5 V1 EN E = 11500∠0°+ (5600∠-63.57°- 5600∠176.42°) · (0.170378∠90°) = 12490 V The excitation level M of the machine is calculated. 12490 49 98 Excitation level M =...
Page 688 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-433F1AF8-DA0B-4FEA-A281-1872487F3B97 V1 EN Figure 345: Operating curve of "OvExt IDMT Crv2" based on the settings specified in example 3. The two dots marked on the curve are referred to in the text. If the excitation level stays at 1.26, the operation occurs after 26360 milliseconds as per the marked dot in Figure 345.
Page 689 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-78B05F4B-3434-4DD5-89F6-17F099444C04 V1 EN Figure 346: Operating curve of “OvExt IDMT Crv4” based on the specified settings. The two dots marked on the curve are referred to in the text. If the excitation level stays at 1.25, the operation occurs after 15200 milliseconds. At the excitation level of 1.42, the time to operation would be 5900 milliseconds as per the two dots in Figure...
Page 690 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Positive-phase sequence voltage SIGNAL Measured frequency BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal Table 641: OEPVPH Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operated START BOOLEAN Started BLK_RESTART BOOLEAN Signal for blocking reconnection of an overheated machine COOL_ACTIVE BOOLEAN...
Page 691 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Phase selection 1=A or AB 1=A or AB Parameter for phase selection 2=B or BC 3=C or CA Leakage React 0.0...50.0 Leakage reactance of the machine Voltage Max Cont 80...160 Maximum allowed continuous operating voltage ratio...
Page 692 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Characteristic Value Retardation time <45 ms Operate time accuracy in definite-time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms Operate time accuracy in inverse-time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±50 ms 1) Results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements 2) Includes the delay of the signal output contact 4.5.9...
Page 693 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-722239A2-AF2E-4E0A-A0B1-95AE99F24CF2 V1 EN Figure 348: Functional module diagram LVRT curve monitoring LVRT curve monitoring starts with detection of undervoltage. Undervoltage detection depends on Voltage selection setting. All selectable options are based on fundamental frequency components. Function uses phase-to-earth voltages when Voltage selection is set to “Highest Ph-to- E”...
Page 694 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions When Recovery time 1 is set to non-zero value, it results into horizontal characteristics from point of fault till Recovery time 1. Two examples of LVRT curve are defined in Figure 349 Figure 350 with corresponding settings in Table...
Page 695 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 647: Settings for example A and B Settings Curve A Curve B Voltage start value 0.9 · Un 0.9 · Un Active coordinates Voltage level 1 0.2 · Un 0 · Un Recovery time 1 500 ms 150 ms Voltage level 2...
Page 696 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-B0166278-6381-4BFF-B859-4A60583007FA V1 EN Figure 351: Typical example of operation of LVRTPTUV function Activation of the BLOCK input resets the timers and deactivates the function outputs. 4.5.9.5 Application Distributed generation, mainly wind and solar farms, are rapidly increasing due to liberalized markets (deregulation) and the global trend to use more renewable sources of energy.
Page 697 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions • At the time of system faults, the magnitude of the voltage may dip to Voltage level 1 for time defined by Recovery time 1. The generating unit has to remain connected to the network during such condition. This boundary defines area A. •...
Page 698 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.5.9.6 Signals Table 648: LVRTPTUV Input signals Name Type Default Description U_A_AB SIGNAL Phase-to-earth voltage A or phase-to-phase voltage AB U_A_BC SIGNAL Phase-to-earth voltage B or phase-to-phase voltage BC U_A_CA SIGNAL Phase-to-earth voltage C or phase-to-phase voltage CA SIGNAL Positive phase sequence voltage...
Page 699 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Voltage level 4 0.00...1.20 0.01 0.90 4th voltage coordinate for defining LVRT curve Voltage level 5 0.00...1.20 0.01 0.90 5th voltage coordinate for defining LVRT curve Voltage level 6 0.00...1.20 0.01 0.90...
Page 700 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.5.9.9 Technical data Table 653: LVRTPTUV Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured voltage: ±2 Hz ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × U Typically 40 ms 1)2) Start time Reset time...
Page 701 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.5.10.4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are “On” and “Off”. The operation of VVSPPAM can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
Page 702 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions sequence voltage U1SHIFT, which resulted in the activation of last OPERATE output, are available in the Monitored data view. The activation of BLOCK input deactivates the INT_BLKD output. GUID-174B2AC6-B830-4A0D-B072-80FFF3EBF159 V1 EN Figure 355: Vector shift during Loss of Mains Pulse timer Once the Pulse timer is activated, it activates the OPERATE output.
Page 703 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions other machines. Islanding can occur as a consequence of a fault in the network, due to circuit breaker maloperation or due to circuit breaker opening during maintenance. If the distributed generator continues its operation after the utility supply is disconnected, faults do not clear under certain conditions as the arc is charged by the distributed generators.
Page 704 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Vector shift and rate of change of frequency are two parallel criteria typically used for detection of Loss of Mains. Chosen protection criteria can be included in the Application Configuration tool to create multicriteria loss of mains alarm or trip. 4.5.10.6 Signals Table 654:...
Page 705 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 659: VVSPPAM Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Phase supervision 7=Ph A + B + C 8=Pos sequence Monitored voltage phase 8=Pos sequence 4.5.10.8 Monitored data Table 660: VVSPPAM Monitored data Name Type...
Page 706 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Frequency protection 4.6.1 Frequency protection FRPFRQ 4.6.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Frequency protection FRPFRQ f>/f<,df/dt 4.6.1.2 Function block GUID-744529D8-E976-4AFD-AA77-85D6ED2C3B70 V1 EN Figure 356: Function block 4.6.1.3 Functionality The frequency protection function FRPFRQ is used to protect network components...
Page 707 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions OPERATE Freq>/< START detection OPR_OFRQ Operate OPR_UFRQ logic ST_OFRQ ST_UFRQ df/dt dF/dt detection OPR_FRG ST_FRG Blocking BLOCK logic GUID-76692C3F-8B09-4C69-B598-0288CB946300 V1 EN Figure 357: Functional module diagram Freq>/< detection The frequency detection module includes an overfrequency or underfrequency detection based on the Operation mode setting.
Page 708 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 662: Operation modes for operation logic Operation mode Description Freq< The function operates independently as the underfrequency ("Freq<") protection function. When the measured frequency is Start value Freq< setting, the module below the set value of the activates the START and STR_UFRQ outputs.
Page 709 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Operation mode Description Freq> + df/dt A consecutive operation is enabled between the protection methods. When the measured frequency exceeds the set value of Start value Freq> setting, the frequency gradient protection is enabled. After the frequency exceeds the set value, the frequency gradient is compared to the set value of the Start value df/dt setting.
Page 710 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The combined start duration START_DUR indicates the maximum percentage ratio of the active protection modes. The values are available via the Monitored data view. Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration/System/ Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode.
Page 711 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions frequency gradient can be used for both increasing and decreasing the frequencies. This function provides an output signal suitable for load shedding, generator shedding, generator boosting, set point change in sub-transmission DC systems and gas turbine startup.
Page 712 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value df/dt -0.2000...0.2000 xFn /s 0.0025 0.0100 Frequency start value rate of change Operate Tm Freq 80...200000 Operate delay time for frequency Operate Tm df/dt 120...200000 Operate delay time for frequency rate of change Table 667:...
Page 713 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.6.1.10 Technical revision history Table 671: FRPFRQ Technical revision history Technical revision Change Step value changed from 0.001 to 0.0001 for the Start value Freq> and Start value Freq< settings. df/dt setting step changed from 0.005 ×Fn /s to 0.0025 ×Fn /s.
Page 714 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Throughout this document, “high df/dt” is used to mean “a high rate of change of the frequency in negative direction.” Once the frequency has stabilized, LSHDPFRQ can restore the load that is shed during the frequency disturbance.
Page 715 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Tm Freq, the OPR_FRQ output is activated if the underfrequency condition still persists. If the frequency becomes normal before the module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time, the timer resets and the ST_FRQ output is deactivated.
Page 716 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Frequency Start value Freq set at 0.975 xFn [Hz] Start value df/dt set at -0.020 xFn/s 50 Hz Operate Tm df/dt = 500ms Operate Tm Freq = 1000ms Load shed mode = Freq< AND df/dt 49 Hz 48.75 Hz Time [s]...
Page 717 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Frequency Start value Freq set at 0.975 xFn [Hz] Start value df/dt set at -0.020 xFn/s Operate Tm df/dt = 500ms 50 Hz Operate Tm Freq = 1000ms Load shed mode = Freq< AND df/dt 49 Hz Time [s] ST_FRG...
Page 718 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Restoring mode Description Disabled Load restoration is disabled. Restore Auto In the “Auto” mode, input frequency is continuously compared to the start Val setting. The restore detection module includes a timer with the DT characteristics.
Page 719 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions margin. The safe margin of operation is usually less than ±0.5 Hz. The system frequency stability is one of the main concerns in the transmission and distribution network operation and control. To protect the frequency-sensitive electrical equipment in the network, departure from the allowed band for safe operation should be inhibited.
Page 720 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Frequency [Hz] 50 Hz 48.8 Hz Time [s] START OPERATE ST_REST RESTORE Set Restore delay time Restore timer Timer Timer Timer starts suspended continues GUID-8694ACBB-CC73-46E6-A9C9-5DE27F6FC7AF V3 EN Figure 362: Operation of the load-shedding function Power system protection by load-shedding The decision on the amount of load that is required to be shed is taken through the measurement of frequency and the rate of change of frequency (df/dt).
Page 721 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions If a moderate system operates at 50 Hz, an underfrequency should be set for different steps from 49.2 Hz to 47.5 Hz in steps of 0.3 – 0.4 Hz. The operating time for the underfrequency can be set from a few seconds to a few fractions of a second stepwise from a higher frequency value to a lower frequency value.
Page 722 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 674: Setting for a five-step restoring operation Load-shedding steps Restoring start Val setting Restore delay time setting 0.990 · Fn (49.5 Hz) 200000 ms 0.990 · Fn (49.5 Hz) 160000 ms 0.990 · Fn (49.5 Hz) 100000 ms 0.990 ·...
Page 723 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value df/dt -0.200...-0.005 xFn /s 0.005 -0.010 Setting of frequency gradient for df/dt detection Operate Tm Freq 80...200000 Time delay to operate for under frequency stage Operate Tm df/dt 120...200000 Time delay to operate for df/dt stage...
Page 724 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Impedance protection 4.7.1 Three-phase underexcitation protection UEXPDIS 4.7.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Three-phase underexcitation protection UEXPDIS X< 4.7.1.2 Function block GUID-1D165D41-1EE8-4AF4-A3F5-E688F97850DB V1 EN Figure 363: Function block 4.7.1.3 Functionality...
Page 725 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-8AD2B23E-F625-4B01-BD82-EA15FF35989A V1 EN Figure 364: Functional module diagram Impedance calculation This module calculates the apparent impedance based on the selected voltages and currents. The Measurement mode and Phase Sel for Z Clc settings determine which voltages and currents are to be used.
Page 726 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions If the magnitude of the voltage is less than 0.05 · U , the calculated impedance is not reliable and the impedance calculation is disabled. U is the rated phase-to-phase voltage. The calculated impedance magnitudes and angles are available in the Monitored data view.
Page 727 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions of excitation. An open circuit in the field circuit also causes a loss of excitation. These are typical examples which cause underexcitation in synchronous machines. This module detects the underexcitation condition for the above cases when the calculated impedance enters the operating characteristics.
Page 728 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The underexcitation also causes the generator to operate in the asynchronous mode. This increases the rotor speed, which causes heating in the rotor iron and damps the windings. A high intake of the reactive power from the network during underexcitation causes problems in the network, for example voltage dip, stability and power swings.
Page 729 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 683: Parameters of the circle Setting values Description Offset Distance of the top of the circle from the R-axis. This is usually set equal to - x ’/2, where x ’ is the transient reactance of the machine. The sign of the setting value determines the top of the circle regarding the R-axis.
Page 730 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions X (Reactance) R (Resistance) Relay operation characteristics a) Z locus in under excitation for heavily loaded machine b) Z locus in under excitation for lightly loaded machine c) Z locus for a fault in the network GUID-C7940DC8-04A8-4FED-B089-DAA9B21D50DB V2 EN Figure 367: Typical impedance locus in underexcitation: a) heavy load b) light...
Page 731 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.7.1.7 Settings Table 686: UEXPDIS Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Diameter 1...6000 Diameter of the Mho diagram Offset -1000...1000 Offset of top of the impedance circle from the R-axis Displacement -1000...1000 Displacement of impedance circle centre...
Page 732 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Z_ANGLE_B FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Impedance angle phase Z_AMPL_C FLOAT32 0.00...200.00 Impedance amplitude phase C Z_ANGLE_C FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Impedance angle phase Z_AMPL_AB FLOAT32 0.00...200.00 Phase-to-phase A-B impedance amplitude Z_ANGLE_AB FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Phase-to-phase A-B impedance phase angle...
Page 733 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Power protection 4.8.1 Underpower protection DUPPDPR 4.8.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Underpower protection DUPPDPR P< 4.8.1.2 Function block GUID-4EC3361A-FD8E-4925-B133-7E9C402DA564 V1 EN Figure 368: Function block 4.8.1.3 Functionality The underpower protection function DUPPDPR is used for protecting generators and...
Page 734 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-9F4E5EA7-0B5E-4523-A25E-FC9A008A7374 V1 EN Figure 369: Functional module diagram Power calculation This module calculates the apparent power based on the selected voltage and current measurements as described in Table 691. The Measurement mode setting determines which voltage and current measurements are to be used.
Page 735 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Measurement mode setting Power calculation PhsA = ⋅ ⋅ PhsB = ⋅ ⋅ PhsC = ⋅ ⋅ If all three phase voltages and phase currents are fed to the protection relay, the positive-sequence alternative is recommended (default). Depending on the set Measurement mode, the power calculation calculates active power, reactive power and apparent power values from the available set of measurements.
Page 736 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Operating operating area area Start Value GUID-D4104D30-04BC-4FE5-978A-1401F1D5301F V2 EN Figure 370: Operating characteristics of DUPPDPR with setting Start value Timer Once activated, the Timer activates the START output. The time characteristics are according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate delay time, the OPERATE output is activated.
Page 737 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the protection relay's program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected with the global setting Blocking mode. The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers" mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value.
Page 738 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.8.1.6 Signals Table 692: DUPPDPR Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current SIGNAL Positive sequence current U_A_AB SIGNAL Phase-to-earth voltage A or phase-to-phase voltage AB U_B_BC SIGNAL...
Page 739 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 696: DUPPDPR Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Measurement mode 1=PhsA, PhsB, 3=Pos Seq Selection of power calculation method PhsC 2=Arone 3=Pos Seq 4=PhsAB 5=PhsBC 6=PhsCA 7=PhsA 8=PhsB 9=PhsC Reset delay time 0...60000...
Page 740 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Characteristic Value Reset ratio Typically 1.04 Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value of ±20 ms Suppression of harmonics -50 dB at f = n × f , where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,… Measurement mode = “Pos Seq”...
Page 741 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.8.2.4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". The operation of DOPPDPR can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
Page 742 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Measurement mode setting Power calculation PhsAB ⋅ ⋅ − PhsBC ⋅ ⋅ − PhsCA ⋅ ⋅ − PhsA = ⋅ ⋅ PhsB = ⋅ ⋅ PhsC = ⋅ ⋅ If all three phase voltages and phase currents are fed to the protection relay, the positive-sequence alternative is recommended.
Page 743 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions By setting the value to "True", the measured apparent power is turned 180 degrees. Non operating Operating area area Start value GUID-6D7F4DBD-73FF-40C4-87B6-22BDC54A41E2 V2 EN Figure 373: Operating characteristics with the Start Value setting, the Power angle setting being 0 and Directional mode "Forward"...
Page 744 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Timer Once activated, the Timer activates the START output. The time characteristics are according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate delay time, the OPERATE output is activated. If a drop-off situation happens, that is, the value of power drops below Start value before the operate delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated.
Page 745 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions one or more blades in the steam turbine or an inadvertent closing of the main stop valves are typical causes for the low steam flow. The steam turbines of turbo generators can be protected during a low steam flow with the overpower protection operating in reverse direction.
Page 746 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Operating area Operating Non operating area operating area area (a ) GUID-69E16240-232F-4B20-B2C0-7CD73E5376C1 V2 EN Figure 375: Forward active overpower characteristics (a) and forward reactive overpower characteristics (b) Operating operating area area operating area Operating area GUID-37C694E9-74A9-4E39-A529-86B6A7FFAA6F V2 EN Figure 376: Reverse active overpower characteristics (a) and reverse reactive...
Page 747 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.8.2.6 Signals Table 700: DOPPDPR Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current U_A_AB SIGNAL Phase-to-earth voltage A or phase-to-phase voltage AB U_A_BC SIGNAL Phase-to-earth voltage B or phase-to-phase voltage BC U_A_CA...
Page 748 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 704: DOPPDPR Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0...60000 Reset delay time Pol reversal 0=False 0=False Reverse the definition of the power 1=True direction 4.8.2.8 Monitored data Table 705: DOPPDPR Monitored data...
Page 749 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.8.3 Directional reactive power undervoltage protection DQPTUV 4.8.3.1 Identification Description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Directional reactive power undervoltage DQPTUV Q> ->,3U< 32Q,27 protection 4.8.3.2 Function block GUID-C043067F-F0F7-4168-BBB5-14442B2CE163 V1 EN Figure 377: Function block 4.8.3.3...
Page 750 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-C488DC7F-2257-47E0-B352-09D29D49AFC3 V1 EN Figure 378: Functional module diagram Under voltage detection Under voltage detection compares the fundamental frequency component of all three phase-to-phase voltages with the set Voltage start value. When all three phase-to- phase voltages are lower than the set Voltage start value, the Under voltage detection module sends an enable signal to the Timer indicating an undervoltage condition at the grid connection point.
Page 751 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-9C7C3D36-0158-47B5-902B-E4F22830C03E V1 EN Figure 379: Operating area of DQPTUV function Quadrant II Generator produces active power, but draws reactive power (under-excited) Quadrant III Generator produces both active and reactive power The power direction can be reversed by setting Pol reversal to “True”. Timer Once activated by both Under voltage detection and Reactive power monitoring module, the Timer activates the START output.
Page 752 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers" mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value. In the "Block all" mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block OPERATE output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not activated.
Page 753 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 708: DQPTUV Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start 4.8.3.7 Settings Table 709: DQPTUV Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Voltage start value 0.20...1.20 0.01 0.85 Start value for under voltage detection Operate delay time...
Page 754 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.8.3.9 Technical data Table 713: DQPTUV Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current and voltage: ±2 Hz Reactive power range |PF| <0.71 Power: ±3.0% or ±0.002 × Q Voltage: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 ×...
Page 755 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The function detects light from an arc either locally or via a remote light signal. The function also monitors phase and residual currents to be able to make accurate decisions on ongoing arcing situations. The function contains a blocking functionality.
Page 756 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions OPR_MODE input is activated, the operation of the function is based on light information only. When the OPR_MODE input is deactivated, the operation of the function is based on both light and current information. When the required criteria are met, the drop-off timer is activated.
Page 757 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions input of another relay, or by routing the light signal output through the communication to an input of another relay. It is possible to block the tripping and the light signal output of the arc protection stage with a binary input or a signal from another function block.
Page 758 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Arc protection with several protection relays When using several protection relays, the protection relay protecting the outgoing feeder trips the circuit breaker of the outgoing feeder when detecting an arc at the cable terminations. If the protection relay protecting the outgoing feeder detects an arc on the busbar or in the breaker compartment via one of the other lens sensors, it will generate a signal to the protection relay protecting the incoming feeder.
Page 759 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions HSO2 REF 615 HSO1 3I, Io 3I, Io 3I, Io 3I, Io 3I, Io REF 615 REF 615 REF 615 REF 615 Binary horisontal GOOSE connection Ethernet switch GUID-ADDBDA34-D5C7-47E9-B2B6-B44F3D3921B3 V1 EN Figure 384: Arc protection with several protection relays and high-speed outputs and GOOSE Arc protection with several protection relays and a separate arc protection system...
Page 760 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions A040364 V2 EN Figure 385: Arc protection with several protection relays and a separate arc protection system 4.9.6 Signals Table 714: ARCSARC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current SIGNAL...
Page 761 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.9.7 Settings Table 716: ARCSARC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Phase start value 0.50...40.00 0.01 2.50 Operating phase current Ground start value 0.05...8.00 0.01 0.20 Operating residual current Operation mode 1=Light+current 1=Light+current Operation mode...
Page 762 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.9.10 Technical revision history Table 720: ARCSARC Technical revision history Technical revision Change Internal Improvement. 4.10 Motor start-up supervision STTPMSU 4.10.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Motor start-up supervision STTPMSU Is2t n<...
Page 763 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions STTPMSU also protects the motor from an excessive number of start-ups. Upon exceeding the specified number of start-ups within certain duration, STTPMSU blocks further starts. The restart of the motor is also inhibited after each start and continues to be inhibited for a set duration.
Page 764 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions In the "IIt & stall" mode, the function calculates the thermal stress of the motor during the start-up condition. The start-up condition is detected by monitoring the TRMS currents. In the "IIt & stall, CB" mode, the function calculates the thermal stress of the motor during the start-up condition but the start-up condition is detected by monitoring the TRMS current as well as the circuit breaker status.
Page 765 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions some cases, the CB_CLOSED input can be active but the value of current may not be greater than the value of the Motor standstill A setting. To allow both possibilities, a time slot of 200 milliseconds is provided for current and the CB_CLOSED input. If both events occur during this time, the motor start-up is recognized.
Page 766 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The Str over delay time setting has different purposes in different modes of operation. • In the “IIt” or “IIt & stall” modes, the aim of this setting is to check for the completion of the motor start-up period. The purpose of this time delay setting is to allow for short interruptions in the current without changing the state of the MOT_START output.
Page 767 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The module also measures the time START_TIME required by the motor to attain the rated speed and the relative thermal stress IIT_RL. The values are available in the Monitored data view. The activation of the BLOCK input signal resets the thermal stress calculator and deactivates the OPR_IIT output.
Page 768 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-200BC4CB-8B33-4616-B014-AFCC99ED9224 V2 EN Figure 390: Time delay for cumulative start This module also protects the motor from consecutive start-ups. When the LOCK_START output is active, T_RST_ENA shows the possible time for next restart. The value of T_RST_ENA is calculated by the difference of Restart inhibit time and the elapsed time from the instant LOCK_START is enabled.
Page 769 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The full-voltage starting or the direct-on-line starting method is used out of the many methods used for starting the induction motor. If there is either an electrical or mechanical constraint, this starting method is not suitable. The full-voltage starting produces the highest starting torque.
Page 770 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions When the permissible stall time is less than the starting time of the motor, the stalling protection is used and the value of the time delay setting should be set slightly less than the permissible stall time. The speed switch on the motor shaft must be used for detecting whether the motor begins to accelerate or not.
Page 771 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-6E9B7247-9009-4302-A79B-B326009ECC7A V2 EN Figure 392: Typical motor-starting and capability curves Setting of Cumulative time Lim Cumulative time Lim is calculated by t margin ∑ − × + (Equation 144) GUID-0214B677-48D0-4DD4-BD1E-67BA9FD3C345 V1 EN specified maximum allowed number of motor start-ups start-up time of the motor (in seconds) margin safety margin (~10...20 percent) Setting of Counter Red rate...
Page 772 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.10.6 Signals Table 721: STTPMSU Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block of function BLK_LK_ST BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks lock out condition for restart of motor CB_CLOSED BOOLEAN 0=False...
Page 773 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 725: STTPMSU Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On 5=off Operation mode 1=IIt 1=IIt Motor start-up operation mode 2=IIt, CB 3=IIt + stall 4=IIt + stall, CB Counter Red rate 2.0...250.0...
Page 774 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.10.9 Technical data Table 728: STTPMSU Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 Hz ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × I Minimum Typical Maximum Start time 1)2)
Page 775 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.11.3 Functionality The multipurpose protection function MAPGAPC is used as a general protection with many possible application areas as it has flexible measuring and setting facilities. The function can be used as an under- or overprotection with a settable absolute hysteresis limit.
Page 776 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions value settings. The resulting threshold value for the comparator can be increased or decreased depending on the sign and value of the Start value Add setting. Timer Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is according to DT.
Page 777 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.11.6 Signals Table 731: MAPGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description AI_VALUE FLOAT32 Analogue input value BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode ENA_ADD BOOLEAN 0=False Enable start added Table 732: MAPGAPC Output signals Name Type...
Page 778 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.11.8 Monitored data Table 736: MAPGAPC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / operate time MAPGAPC Enum 1=on Status 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 4.11.9 Technical data Table 737: MAPGAPC Technical data Characteristic...
Page 779 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.12.1.3 Functionality The three-phase overload protection for shunt capacitor banks function COLPTOC provides single-phase, two-phase and three-phase protection against overloads caused by harmonic currents and overvoltages in shunt capacitor banks. The operation of overload and alarm is based on the peak value of the integrated current which is proportional to the voltage across the capacitor.
Page 780 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions I_PEAK_INT_C values are available in monitored data view. The frequency response of the peak integrated current calculator can be seen in Figure 397. GUID-81EC4C3E-7E8C-4BDF-9AE3-D4133690CD04 V1 EN Figure 397: Frequency response of the peak integrated current calculator Operate level detector The Operate level detector compares I_PEAK_INT_x value to Start value overload.
Page 781 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Operate time is based on maximum value of I_PEAK_INT_A, I_PEAK_INT_B and I_PEAK_INT_C. From maximum value calculated , operate time between any two consecutive points in the standard table is based on logarithmic interpolation. The operate time can be scaled using the Time multiplier setting. The OPR_OVLOD output is activated if the overload situation lasts long enough to exceed the operation time.
Page 782 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-17CFB7BD-8839-467B-92F8-750624D737CE V1 EN Figure 398: Inverse-time characteristic curves for overload stage If the integrated current exceeds 1.1 times the setting Start value overload for a short period but does not operate as the current decreases within Start value overload, the output ST_OVLOD is kept active but the operation timer is frozen.
Page 783 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions only once and remains within the Start value overload area for 24 hours, the operation timer and the output ST_OVLOD are reset. GUID-21B1AE66-D9B1-4F10-9678-45DC0366784A V1 EN Figure 399: The behavior of the IDMT timer and the output ST_OVLOD The ST_DUR_OVLOD output indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the operation time in the Timer 1 module and is available in the monitored data view.
Page 784 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Timer 2 The Timer 2 characteristics are according to Definite Time (DT) .When the operation timer has reached the value of Alarm delay time, the ALARM output is activated. If a drop-off situation happens, the timer is reset. The Timer 2 module is internally blocked for one second after the capacitor bank is connected by detecting the rising edge of the CB_CLOSED signal.
Page 785 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Inhibit reclose When the output OPR_UN_I becomes active or when the CB_CLOSED state changes from TRUE to FALSE, that is, when circuit breaker opens, the reclosing inhibition module activates output BLK_CLOSE. If Enable under current is set to “Disable”, the reclosing inhibition operation is based purely on the CB_CLOSED input.
Page 786 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions a period of time. To avoid an undercurrent trip operation when the capacitor bank is disconnected from the power system, the undercurrent functionality is blocked by using the capacitor bank circuit breaker status signal. Furthermore, the reclosing inhibition feature provides protection against the reconnection of a charged capacitor to a live network.
Page 787 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 742: COLPTOC Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Reclose inhibit time 1...6000 Reclose inhibit time Table 743: COLPTOC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on...
Page 788 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.12.1.9 Technical data Table 746: COLPTOC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 Hz, and no harmonics 5% of the set value or 0.002 × I Typically 75 ms 1)2) Start time for overload stage...
Page 789 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.12.2.2 Function block GUID-6447040F-55DC-4FA5-9111-0941695F8544 V1 EN Figure 400: Function block symbol 4.12.2.3 Functionality The current unbalance protection for shunt capacitor banks function CUBPTOC is used to protect the double-Y-connected capacitor banks from internal faults. CUBPTOC is suitable for the protection of internally fused, externally fused and fuseless applications.
Page 790 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-C448B20B-4253-4F41-BB8A-ADA6A8E59CE3 V1 EN Figure 401: Functional module diagram Natural unbalance Compensation A standard double-Y-connected shunt capacitor bank configuration is shown in Figure 402. The fundamental frequency component of an unbalance current is measured on the common neutral connecting the two balanced parts of a shunt capacitor bank, that is, between star point 1 and star point 2.
Page 791 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions In a three-phase star-connected capacitor bank circuit, there may be some amount of natural unbalance current flowing through the neutral, which is primarily due to capacitor manufacturing tolerances. The natural unbalance current must be compensated for before using the measured unbalance current for the function operation.
Page 792 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The amplitude I_AMPL_COMP and the angle I_ANGL_COMP of the compensated unbalance current are available in the monitored data view. CompUnb Level detector 1 The calculated compensated unbalance current I_AMPL_COMP is compared to the set Start value. If I_AMPL_COMP exceeds the set Start value, the Level detector 1 sends an enabling signal to the Timer 1 module.
Page 793 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions For an external fuse capacitor bank, the element failure location and corresponding counters to be incremented are determined based on the phase angle of the compensated unbalance current. Table 749: Element failure location and counters to be incremented for external fuse case Phase angle of the compensated Phase and branch of the element Counters to be incremented...
Page 794 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Phase angle of the compensated Phase and branch of the element Counters to be incremented unbalance current (degrees) failure -75...-105 Phase-B branch 2 COUNT_BR2_B Phase-C branch 1 COUNT_BR1_C -105...-135 Phase-B branch 2 COUNT_BR2_B -135...-165 Phase-B branch 2 COUNT_BR2_B Phase-A branch 1...
Page 795 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Alarm control Depending on the Alarm mode setting, the alarm stage operation is according to “Normal mode” or “Element counter mode”. In the “Normal mode” the time characteristic is according to DT. When the alarm timer has reached the value set by Alarm delay time, the ALARM output is activated.
Page 796 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions provides a sophisticated method of detecting the number of faulty elements in each phase by calculating the differential unbalance current. The unbalance protection function can be used for internally fused, externally fused and fuseless shunt capacitor banks. Since a fuseless capacitor bank lacks the individual capacitor unit fuses, current unbalance protection becomes even more critical for fuseless applications.
Page 797 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-D7B7D142-7CF4-4DFB-B8E5-876F6C3579C7 V1 EN Figure 404: Example of double-Y-connected shunt capacitor bank unbalance protection Connect the phase current analog input I_A and unbalance current I_UNB to the IED for the CUBPTOC function to start working. Steps to measure natural unbalance current The setting Natural Comp Enable must be set to “TRUE”.
Page 798 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions The natural unbalance recording should be made only during the steady-state condition and when all the capacitor bank elements are assumed to be in service. 4.12.2.6 Signals Table 751: CUBPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description I_UNB...
Page 799 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Table 754: CUBPTOC Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Fuse location 1=Internal 1=Internal Location of capacitor fuse 2=External Element fail limit 1...100 Element failure limit above which alarm is active Natural Comp enable 0=False 0=False...
Page 800 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description COUNT_BR2_A INT32 0...2147483647 Number of element failures in branch2 phase-A COUNT_BR1_B INT32 0...2147483647 Number of element failures in branch1 phase-B COUNT_BR2_B INT32 0...2147483647 Number of element failures in branch2 phase-B COUNT_BR1_C INT32...
Page 801 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.12.2.10 Technical revision history Table 759: CUBPTOC Technical revision history Technical revision Change Selection name for Recorded unbalance changed. 4.12.3 Shunt capacitor bank switching resonance protection, current based SRCPTOC 4.12.3.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification...
Page 802 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-9D427F91-9B97-4C4B-A2FA-A0772C149B38 V1 EN Figure 406: Functional module diagram Resonance current calculation This module calculates the resonance current per phase set as per setting Tuning harmonic Num. The resonance current for phase A is calculated with the equation. I RESO A −...
Page 803 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions GUID-8F2E7A59-BA62-4D8B-A97D-F00933BE291A V1 EN Figure 407: Magnitude response of High pass and all the harmonic Band stop filters Similarly resonance current is calculated in the same way for phase B and phase C. Resonance currents I_RESO_A, I_RESO_B and I_RESO_C are available in the monitored data view.
Page 804 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Timer 1 Once activated, the timer activates the alarm timer. The timer characteristic is according to DT. When the alarm timer has reached the value set by Alarm delay time, the ALARM output is activated. If the fault disappears before the alarm activates, the alarm timer is reset immediately.
Page 805 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions voltage and current distortions, which increases losses and causes overheating of other equipment in the circuit. A traditional way of solving the problem is to conduct a detailed system study for each individual installation and use the results to properly size the capacitors and determine the right operating range of capacitors to avoid harmonic resonance with other system components.
Page 806 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions Settings Alarm start value and Start value should be selected as such that in normal operation SRCPTOC should not operate. 4.12.3.6 Signals Table 760: SRCPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL...
Page 807 Section 4 1MRS757644 F Protection functions 4.12.3.8 Monitored data Table 764: SRCPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description I_RESO_A FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Resonance current for phase A I_RESO_B FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Resonance current for phase B I_RESO_C FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Resonance current for phase C SRCPTOC Enum...
Page 809 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions Section 5 Protection related functions Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR 5.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR 3I2f> 5.1.2 Function block A070377 V1 EN Figure 408: Function block 5.1.3...
Page 810 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions The operation of INRPHAR can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections. A070694 V2 EN Figure 409: Functional module diagram I_2H/I_1H This module calculates the ratio of the second harmonic (I_2H) and fundamental frequency (I_1H) phase currents.
Page 811 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions It is recommended to use the second harmonic and the waveform based inrush blocking from the TR2PTDF function, if available. 5.1.5 Application Transformer protections require high stability to avoid tripping during magnetizing inrush conditions. A typical example of an inrush detector application is doubling the start value of an overcurrent protection during inrush detection.
Page 812 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions 5.1.6 Signals Table 767: INRPHAR Input signals Name Type Default Description I_2H_A SIGNAL Second harmonic phase A current I_1H_A SIGNAL Fundamental frequency phase A current I_2H_B SIGNAL Second harmonic phase B current I_1H_B SIGNAL Fundamental frequency phase B current I_2H_C...
Page 813 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions 5.1.9 Technical data Table 773: INRPHAR Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy At the frequency f = f Current measurement: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × I Ratio I2f/I1f measurement: ±5.0% of the set value Reset time +35 ms / -0 ms Reset ratio...
Page 814 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions 5.2.3 Functionality The circuit breaker failure protection function CCBRBRF is activated by trip commands from the protection functions. The commands are either internal commands to the terminal or external commands through binary inputs. The start command is always a default for three-phase operation.
Page 815 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions of the value to the start, retrip and backup trip logics. The parameter should be set low enough so that breaker failure situations with small fault current or high load current can be detected. The setting can be chosen in accordance with the most sensitive protection function to start the breaker failure protection.
Page 816 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions GUID-61D73737-798D-4BA3-9CF2-56D57719B03D V4 EN Figure 413: Start logic Timer 1 Once activated, the timer runs until the set Retrip time value has elapsed. The time characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set with Retrip time, the retrip logic is activated.
Page 817 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions It is often required that the total fault clearance time is less than the given critical time. This time often depends on the ability to maintain transient stability in case of a fault close to a power plant.
Page 818 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions active for the time set with the Trip pulse time setting or the time the circuit breaker is in the closed position, whichever is longer. • If CB failure mode is set to "Both", TRRET is activated when either of the "Breaker status"...
Page 819 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions remains active for the time set with the Trip pulse time setting or until the values of all the phase currents or residual currents drop below the Current value and Current value Res setting respectively, whichever takes longer. •...
Page 820 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions GUID-30BB8C04-689A-4FA5-85C4-1DF5E3ECE179 V4 EN Figure 416: Backup trip logic 5.2.5 Application The n-1 criterion is often used in the design of a fault clearance system. This means that the fault is cleared even if some component in the fault clearance system is faulty. A circuit breaker is a necessary component in the fault clearance system.
Page 821 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions CCBRBRF is initiated by operating different protection functions or digital logics inside the protection relay. It is also possible to initiate the function externally through a binary input. CCBRBRF can be blocked by using an internally assigned signal or an external signal from a binary input.
Page 822 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions 5.2.6 Signals Table 775: CCBRBRF Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current SIGNAL Residual current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block CBFP operation START BOOLEAN 0=False CBFP start command...
Page 823 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions Table 778: CCBRBRF Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description CB fault delay 0...60000 5000 Circuit breaker faulty delay Measurement mode 2=DFT 3=Peak-to-Peak Phase current measurement mode of 3=Peak-to-Peak function Trip pulse time 0...60000...
Page 824 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions Master trip TRPPTRC 5.3.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Master trip TRPPTRC Master Trip 94/86 5.3.2 Function block A071286 V2 EN Figure 418: Function block 5.3.3 Functionality The master trip function TRPPTRC is used as a trip command collector and handler...
Page 825 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions A070882 V4 EN Figure 419: Functional module diagram Timer The duration of the TRIP output signal from TRPPTRC can be adjusted with the Trip pulse time setting when the "Non-latched" operation mode is used. The pulse length should be long enough to secure the opening of the breaker.
Page 826 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions 5.3.5 Application All trip signals from different protection functions are routed through the trip logic. The most simplified application of the logic function is linking the trip signal and ensuring that the signal is long enough. The tripping logic in the protection relay is intended to be used in the three-phase tripping for all fault types (3ph operating).
Page 827 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions 5.3.6 Signals Table 783: TRPPTRC Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block of function OPERATE BOOLEAN 0=False Operate RST_LKOUT BOOLEAN 0=False Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout function Table 784: TRPPTRC Output signals Name Type...
Page 828 ABB has developed a patented technology (US Patent 7,069,116 B2 June 27, 2006, US Patent 7,085,659 B2 August 1, 2006) to detect a high-impedance fault.
Page 829 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions PHIZ is limited to be used in 60 Hz electrical networks with efficiently grounded or isolated neutral. 5.4.4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". PHIZ uses a multi-algorithm approach.
Page 830 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions Transformer Feeder Breaker GUID-1911BE79-9816-42E3-87FF-A16F7A130A8E V1 EN Figure 422: Electrical power system equipped with PHIZ Power system signals are acquired, filtered and then processed by individual high- impedance fault detection algorithm. The results of these individual algorithms are further processed by a decision logic to provide the detection decision.
Page 831 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions GUID-61D297F5-783F-4CF2-BD16-18CE537C9E95-ANSI V1 EN GUID-B9AC5923-6A67-431B-A785-171FD132E1A6-ANSI V1 EN Figure 424: Validation of PHIZ on Figure 425: Validation of PHIZ on gravel concrete GUID-988539D2-9893-4B16-8CF6-C32E17991628-ANSI V1 EN GUID-9F87C93B-BF44-4488-BD97-209FC90B592A-ANSI V1 EN Figure 426: Validation of PHIZ on Figure 427: Validation of PHIZ on sand grass...
Page 832 Reliable detection of PHIZ provides safety to humans and animals. PHIZ detection can also prevent fire and minimize property damage. ABB has developed innovative technology for high-impedance fault detection with over ten years of research resulting in many successful field tests.
Page 833 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions 5.4.8 Monitored data Table 792: PHIZ Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Position Dbpos 0=intermediate Position 1=open 2=closed 3=faulty PHIZ Enum 1=on Status 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 5.4.9 Technical revision history Table 793: PHIZ Technical revision history Technical revision...
Page 834 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions overload that can damage the motor. The emergency start-up function ESMGAPC allows motor start-ups during such emergency conditions. ESMGAPC is only to force the protection relay to allow the restarting of the motor. After the emergency start input is activated, the motor can be started normally.
Page 835 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions 5.5.5 Application If the motor needs to be started in an emergency condition at the risk of damaging the motor, all the external restart inhibits are ignored, allowing the motor to be restarted. Furthermore, if the calculated thermal level is higher than the restart inhibit level at an emergency start condition, the calculated thermal level is set slightly below the restart inhibit level.
Page 836 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions 5.5.8 Monitored data Table 798: ESMGAPC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description T_ST_EMERG Timestamp Emergency start activation timestamp ESMGAPC Enum 1=on Status 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 5.5.9 Technical data Table 799: ESMGAPC Technical data Characteristic Value...
Page 837 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions 5.6.2 Function block GUID-A4D67F7E-A2C7-439F-9AF4-98445E54A480 V1 EN Figure 430: Function block 5.6.3 Functionality The automatic switch-onto-fault function CVPSOF is a complementary function, especially to the distance protection function (DSTPDIS), but it can also be used to complement the non-directional or directional overcurrent protection functions (PHxPTOC, DPHxPDOC).
Page 838 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions GUID-A6067E5B-B4A1-4CC3-A55B-42DC38C654FC V1 EN Figure 431: Functional module diagram Trigger This module is used for detecting a possible fault immediately after circuit breaker closing. The use of external protection function, typically the start signal from a non- directional distance zone or overcurrent stage, is required for fault indication.
Page 839 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions Table 801: Options for dead line detection Automatic SOTF Ini Description DLD disabled The dead line detection function is disabled. This operation mode must be applied when voltage transformers are located on the bus side of the circuit breaker.
Page 840 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions Dead line detection should be used only when the voltage transformers are located on the line side of the circuit breaker. When the CB_CL_CMD input is activated or the dead line condition is detected, the SOTF control module becomes active.
Page 841 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions An internal dead line detection check is provided to activate the function when the voltage transformers are located on the feeder side. An initiation by the dead line detection is highly recommended for the busbar configurations where more than one circuit breaker at one feeder end can energize the protected feeder or the feeder can also be energized from the other end.
Page 842 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A voltage SIGNAL Phase B voltage SIGNAL Phase C voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode CB_CL_CMD BOOLEAN 0=False External enabling of SOTF by CB close command START BOOLEAN 0=False...
Page 843 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions 5.6.8 Monitored data Table 807: CVPSOF Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description CVPSOF Enum 1=on Status 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 5.6.9 Technical data Table 808: CVPSOF Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage measured: f ±2Hz...
Page 844 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions 5.7.3 Functionality The fault locator function SCEFRFLO provides impedance-based fault location. It is designed for radially operated distribution systems. It is applicable for locating short circuits in all kinds of distribution networks. Earth faults can be located in effectively earthed and in low-resistance or low-reactance earthed networks.
Page 845 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions 5.7.4.1 Phase selection logic Identification of the faulty phases is provided by the built-in Phase Selection Logic based on combined impedance and current criterion. Phase selection logic is virtually setting-free and has only one parameter, Z Max phase load, for discriminating a large symmetrical load from a three-phase fault.
Page 846 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions 5.7.4.2 Fault impedance and distance calculation As soon as a fault condition is recognized by the phase selection logic, the fault distance calculation is started with one of the seven impedance-measuring elements, that is, the fault loops. SCEFRFLO employs independent algorithms for each fault type to achieve optimal performance.
Page 847 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions Flt phase reactance (Equation 155) GUID-56EC16DD-7F6A-4DE5-935E-4302196DE21A V3 EN Estimated positive-sequence resistance from the substation to the fault location Estimated positive-sequence reactance from the substation to the fault location Estimated zero-sequence resistance from the substation to the fault location Estimated zero-sequence reactance from the substation to the fault location Estimated the earth return path resistance (= (R0 –...
Page 848 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions The “Load modelling” algorithm requires the Equivalent load Dis setting, that is, an equivalent load distance, as an additional parameter. The derivation and meaning of this parameter is illustrated in Figure 435, where the load is assumed to be evenly distributed along the feeder, resulting in the actual voltage drop curve as seen in the middle part of Figure...
Page 849 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions d real Equivalent load Dis d tap d (Equation 156) GUID-E447E8AC-65F7-4586-B853-C297347303FF V2 EN The actual maximum voltage drop of the feeder d(real) The fictional voltage drop, if the entire load would be tapped at the end (d=1) of the d(tap,d=1) feeder (not drawn in Figure...
Page 850 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions Considered inaccuracies affecting the calculated fault distance estimate are reported in the recorded result quality indicator value Flt Dist quality in Table 811. Fault loops “AB Fault”, “BC Fault” or “CA Fault” Fault loops “AB Fault”, “BC Fault” or “CA Fault” are used for phase-to-phase short circuit faults as well as in the case of a two-phase-to-earth fault if the individual earth faults are located at the same feeder.
Page 851 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions Fault loop “ABC Fault” Fault loop “ABC Fault” is used exclusively for the three-phase short circuit fault. Figure 437 shows the three-phase fault loop model. The following impedances are measured and stored in the recorded data of SCEFRFLO. Flt point resistance fault (Equation 161)
Page 852 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions Estimation of fault resistance in different fault loops The fault point resistance value provided by the impedance calculation is available in recorded data Flt point resistance and it depends on the applied fault loop as shown in Figure 438.
Page 853 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions ∆ = fault pre fault (Equation 164) GUID-2F67A337-58A8-40F4-B752-678A8D89083E V1 EN Corresponds to the signal value during fault fault Corresponds to the signal value during healthy state just before fault pre-fault Result quality indicator The quality of the estimated fault distance is judged and reported in recorded data as the Flt Dist quality together with the fault distance estimate.
Page 854 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions section A. For the short circuit loops, only positive-sequence impedances are needed. Even these can be omitted in the short circuit loops, if the setting Enable simple model equals "TRUE". If the impedance settings are in use, it is important that the settings closely match the impedances of used conductor types.
Page 855 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions Example values of positive-sequence impedances for typical medium voltage overhead-lines are given in the following tables. Table 812: Positive-sequence impedance values for typical 11 kV conductors, “Flat” tower configuration assumed Name R1 [Ω/km] X1 [Ω/km] ACSR 50 SQ.mm 0.532...
Page 856 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions   − 0 25 ≈ ⋅ ω ⋅ ⋅ Ω     (Equation 168) GUID-6850481D-094B-4FA0-9E73-39DCC6C49BCC V2 EN conductor AC resistance [Ω/km] ρ earth GUID-2FE803A9-203E-44ED-8153-4F5903233736 V1 EN the equivalent depth [m] of the earth return path ρ...
Page 857 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions If the total phase-to-earth capacitance (including all branches) per phase C of the protected feeder is known, the setting value can be calculated. Ph capacitive React ω ⋅ (Equation 169) GUID-3D723613-A007-47ED-B8D7-F9D55C5FBF38 V2 EN In case of unearthed network, if the earth-fault current produced by the protected feeder I is known, the setting value can be calculated.
Page 858 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions For example, if the start delay is 100 ms and the shortest operating time 300 ms, a value of 300 ms can be used. Circuit breaker and disconnector status is used to verify that the entire feeder is measured.
Page 859 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions The non-homogeneity of feeder impedance can be illustrated by drawing the protected feeder in RX-diagram (in the impedance plane), as shown in Figure 442. GUID-AEA0E874-C871-4C90-82ED-3AFE41D28145 V2 EN Figure 442: Example impedance diagram of an electrically non-homogeneous feeder (left), and the resulting error in fault distance if the measured fault loop reactance is converted into physical fault distance by using only one line section parameters (right).
Page 860 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions Taps or spurs in the feeder If the protected feeder consists of taps or spurs, the measured fault impedance corresponds to several physical fault locations (For example, A or B in Figure 443). The actual fault location must be identified using additional information, for example, short circuit current indicators placed on tapping points.
Page 861 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions Generally, SCEFRFLO requires a minimum of two fundamental cycles of measuring time after the fault occurrence. Figure 444 illustrates typical behavior of fault distance estimate of SCEFRFLO as a function of time. • Immediately after the fault occurrence, the estimate is affected by initial fault transients in voltages and currents.
Page 862 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions GUID-59F4E262-44C8-4EF3-A352-E6358C84C791 V2 EN Figure 445: An example of the ALARM output use 5.7.4.5 Recorded data All the information required for a later fault analysis is recorded to SCEFRFLO recorded data. In the protection relay, recorded data is found in Monitoring/ Recorded data/Other protection/SCEFRFLO.
Page 863 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions set to “Delta”) and residual voltage (Uo). Both alternatives are covered by setting the configuration parameter Phase voltage Meas to "Accurate". When the Phase voltage Meas setting is set to "Ph-to-ph without Uo" and only phase- to-phase voltages are available (but not Uo), only short-circuit measuring loops (fault loops “AB Fault”, “BC Fault”...
Page 864 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions 5.7.6 Signals Table 817: SCEFRFLO Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current SIGNAL Residual current SIGNAL Positive sequence current SIGNAL Negative sequence current U_A_AB SIGNAL Phase to earth voltage A or phase to phase voltage...
Page 865 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description R0 line section A 0.000...1000.000 ohm / pu 0.001 4.000 Zero sequence line resistance, line section A X0 line section A 0.000...1000.000 ohm / pu 0.001 4.000 Zero sequence line reactance, line section A...
Page 866 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions Table 822: SCEFRFLO Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description EF algorithm Sel 1=Load 1=Load Selection for PhE-loop calculation compensation compensation algorithm 2=Load modelling EF algorithm Cur Sel 1=Io based 1=Io based Selection for earth-fault current model 2=I2 based...
Page 867 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Flt loop Enum 1=AG Fault Fault loop 2=BG Fault 3=CG Fault 4=AB Fault 5=BC Fault 6=CA Fault 7=ABC Fault -5=No fault Flt distance FLOAT32 0.00...3000.00 Fault distance Flt Dist quality INT32 0...511...
Page 868 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description A Flt Phs B Magn FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Fault current phase B, magnitude A Flt Phs B angle FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Fault current phase B, angle A Flt Phs C Magn FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Fault current phase C,...
Page 869 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions Circuit breaker uncorresponding position start-up UPCALH 5.8.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Circuit breaker uncorresponding UPCALH CBUPS CBUPS position start-up 5.8.2 Function block GUID-95E27040-82AE-46F0-B5AA-D46896F677EA V1 EN Figure 446: Function block 5.8.3...
Page 870 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions CB_POSOPEN CB_POSCLOSE Signal power SI_PWR_ON Operate logic OPERATE supply check Protection activation CB_OPEN_CMD check GUID-2BEA9587-68B3-4B76-BAA5-D53DAA8A0D97 V2 EN Figure 447: Functional module diagram Signal power supply check This module is used for signal power supply supervision. The activation of the SI_PWR_ON input enables the Operate logic module after the value of the CB power on delay time setting has elapsed.
Page 871 Section 5 1MRS757644 F Protection related functions is used as a stand-alone function when an unknown circuit breaker open is detected, the function output can be used as an information indication for the supervision station. 5.8.6 Signals Table 826: UPCALH Input signals Name Type Default...
Page 873 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions Section 6 Supervision functions Trip circuit supervision TCSSCBR 6.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Trip circuit supervision TCSSCBR 6.1.2 Function block A070788 V1 EN Figure 448: Function block 6.1.3 Functionality...
Page 874 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions A070785 V2 EN Figure 449: Functional module diagram TCS status This module receives the trip circuit status from the hardware. A detected failure in the trip circuit activates the timer. Timer Once activated, the timer runs until the set value of Operate delay time has elapsed. The time characteristic is according to DT.
Page 875 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions A051097 V6 EN Figure 450: Operating principle of the trip-circuit supervision with an external resistor. The TCSSCBR blocking switch is not required since the external resistor is used. If TCS is required only in a closed position, the external shunt resistance can be omitted.
Page 876 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions A051906 V4 EN Figure 451: Operating principle of the trip-circuit supervision without an external resistor. The circuit breaker open indication is set to block TCSSCBR when the circuit breaker is open. Trip circuit supervision and other trip contacts It is typical that the trip circuit contains more than one trip contact in parallel, for example in transformer feeders where the trip of a Buchholz relay is connected in parallel with the feeder terminal and other relays involved.
Page 877 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions A070968 V5 EN Figure 452: Constant test current flow in parallel trip contacts and trip circuit supervision In case of parallel trip contacts, the recommended way to do the wiring is that the TCS test current flows through all wires and joints.
Page 878 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions A070970 V3 EN Figure 453: Improved connection for parallel trip contacts where the test current flows through all wires and joints Several trip circuit supervision functions parallel in circuit Not only the trip circuit often have parallel trip contacts, it is also possible that the circuit has multiple TCS circuits in parallel.
Page 879 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions The circuit breaker coil current is normally cut by an internal contact of the circuit breaker. In case of a circuit breaker failure, there is a risk that the protection relay trip contact is destroyed since the contact is obliged to disconnect high level of electromagnetic energy accumulated in the trip coil.
Page 880 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions drop of the feeding auxiliary voltage system which can cause too low voltage values over the TCS contact. In this case, erroneous alarming can occur. At lower (<48 V DC) auxiliary circuit operating voltages, it is recommended to use the circuit breaker position to block unintentional operation of TCS.
Page 881 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions A070972 V4 EN Figure 455: Incorrect connection of trip-circuit supervision A connection of three protection relays with a double pole trip circuit is shown in the following figure. Only the protection relay R3 has an internal TCS circuit. In order to test the operation of the protection relay R2, but not to trip the circuit breaker, the upper trip contact of the protection relay R2 is disconnected, as shown in the figure, while the lower contact is still connected.
Page 882 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions A070974 V5 EN Figure 456: Incorrect testing of protection relays 6.1.6 Signals Table 832: TCSSCBR Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block input status Table 833: TCSSCBR Output signals Name Type Description ALARM BOOLEAN...
Page 883 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions Table 835: TCSSCBR Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 20...60000 1000 Reset delay time 6.1.8 Monitored data Table 836: TCSSCBR Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description TCSSCBR...
Page 884 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions 6.2.3 Functionality The current circuit supervision function CCSPVC is used for monitoring current transformer secondary circuits. CCSPVC calculates internally the sum of phase currents (I_A, I_B and I_C) and compares the sum against the measured single reference current (I_REF).The reference current must originate from other three-phase CT cores than the phase currents (I_A, I_B and I_C) and it is to be externally summated, that is, outside the protection relay.
Page 885 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions GUID-DC279F84-19B8-4FCB-A79A-2461C047F1B2 V1 EN Figure 459: CCSPVC operating characteristics When the differential current I_DIFF is in the operating region, the FAIL output is activated. The function is internally blocked if any phase current is higher than the set Max operate current.
Page 886 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions When the internal blocking is activated, the FAIL output is deactivated immediately immediately. However, the ALARM output is deactivated immediately after a fixed delay of three seconds. The function resets when the differential current is below the start value and the highest phase current is more than 5 percent of the nominal current (0.05 ×...
Page 887 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions GUID-88FC46C8-8D14-45DE-9E36-E517EA3886AA V2 EN Figure 460: Connection diagram for reference current measurement with core- balanced current transformer Current measurement with two independent three-phase sets of CT cores Figure 461 Figure 462 show diagrams of connections where the reference current is measured with two independent three-phase sets of CT cores.
Page 888 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions GUID-8DC3B17A-13FE-4E38-85C6-A228BC03206B V2 EN Figure 461: Connection diagram for current circuit supervision with two sets of three-phase current transformer protection cores When using the measurement core for reference current measurement, it should be noted that the saturation level of the measurement core is much lower than with the protection core.
Page 889 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions GUID-C5A6BB27-36F9-4652-A5E4-E3D32CFEA77B V2 EN Figure 462: Connection diagram for current circuit supervision with two sets of three-phase current transformer cores (protection and measurement) Example of incorrect connection The currents must be measured with two independent cores, that is, the phase currents must be measured with a different core than the reference current.
Page 890 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions GUID-BBF3E23F-7CE4-43A3-8986-5AACA0433235 V2 EN Figure 463: Example of incorrect reference current connection 6.2.6 Signals Table 838: CCSPVC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current I_REF SIGNAL Reference current...
Page 891 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions 6.2.7 Settings Table 840: CCSPVC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation On / Off 5=off Start value 0.05...0.20 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate current differential level Table 841: CCSPVC Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter...
Page 892 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions Advanced current circuit supervision for transformers CTSRCTF 6.3.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Advanced current circuit supervision for CTSRCTF MCS 3I, I2 MCS 3I, I2 transformers 6.3.2 Function block GUID-6EDF2732-697A-4770-AF30-A957E20E7054 V1 EN...
Page 893 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions The operation of CTSRCTF can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections. GUID-813445E7-91CA-4F59-B12A-48B682686DED V2 EN Figure 465: Functional module diagram No-load detection No-load detection module detects the loading condition. If all the three-phase currents of any two sets of current transformer are zero, the protected equipment is considered to be in the no-load condition and the function is internally blocked by activating the INT_BLKD output.
Page 894 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions detected. The change in the magnitude of I (ΔI ) on the other sets of the current transformer (other than where zero current is detected) is calculated. If the change is detected on the healthy sets of CT, it is an indication of system failure. •...
Page 895 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions 6.3.5 Application Open or short-circuited current transformer secondary can cause unwanted operation in many protection functions, such as earth-fault current and differential. The simplest method for detecting the current transformer secondary failure is by comparing currents from two independent three-phase sets of CTs or the CT cores measuring the same primary currents.
Page 896 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions exceeds the set limit, the function is blocked internally. Also in case of an unsymmetrical fault, the negative-sequence current increases. If the negative- sequence current increases beyond the set limit, the function is blocked internally. The overcurrent and negative-sequence current setting both can be set equal to the overcurrent and negative-sequence protection function start value.
Page 897 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions 6.3.7 Settings Table 847: CTSRCTF Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On 5=off Min operate current 0.01...0.50 0.01 0.02 Minimum operate current Max operate current 1.00...5.00 0.01 1.30...
Page 898 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions 6.4.2 Function block GUID-BDB9139A-3F45-479F-9DCA-6C4AAAF33504 V1 EN Figure 466: Function block 6.4.3 Functionality The current transformer supervision for high-impedance protection scheme function HZCCxSPVC is a dedicated phase-segregated supervision function to be used along with the high-impedance differential protection for detecting the broken CT secondary wires.
Page 899 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions GUID-8C5661F6-12FC-4733-886C-01F793DF2FBF V1 EN Figure 467: Functional module diagram Level detector This module compares the differential current I_A to the set Start value. The timer module is activated if the differential current exceeds the value set in the Start value setting.
Page 900 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions 6.4.6 Application HZCCxSPVC is a dedicated phase-segregated supervision function to be used along with the high-impedance differential protection for detecting the broken CT secondary wires. The operation principle of HZCCxSPVC is similar to the high- impedance differential protection function HIxPDIF.
Page 901 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions In the example, the incoming feeder is carrying a load of 2.0 pu and both outgoing feeders carry an equal load of 1.0 pu However, both HIxPDIF and HZCCxSPVC consider the current as an increased differential or unbalance current because of the broken CT wire in phase C.
Page 902 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions Table 855: HZCCCSPVC Output signals Name Type Description ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm output 6.4.8 Settings Table 856: HZCCASPVC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On 5=off Start value 1.0...100.0...
Page 903 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions Table 860: HZCCCSPVC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On 5=off Start value 1.0...100.0 10.0 Start value, percentage of the nominal current Alarm delay time 100...300000 3000 Alarm delay time...
Page 904 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions 6.4.10 Technical data Table 865: HZCCxSPVC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current measured: f ±2 Hz ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × I Reset time <40 ms Reset ratio Typically 0.96...
Page 905 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions 6.5.3 Functionality The fuse failure supervision function SEQSPVC is used to block the voltage- measuring functions when failure occurs in the secondary circuits between the voltage transformer (or combi sensor or voltage sensor) and protection relay to avoid misoperations of the voltage protection functions.
Page 906 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions Voltage check The phase voltage magnitude is checked when deciding whether the fuse failure is a three, two or a single-phase fault. The module makes a phase-specific comparison between each voltage input and the Seal in voltage setting.
Page 907 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions change and a false fuse failure can occur. To prevent this, the minimum phase current criterion is checked. The fuse failure detection is active until the voltages return above the Min Op voltage delta setting. If a voltage in a phase is below the Min Op voltage delta setting, a new fuse failure detection for that phase is not possible until the voltage returns above the setting value.
Page 908 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions Fuse failure detection criterion Conditions and function response Current and voltage delta function criterion If the current and voltage delta criterion detects a fuse failure condition, but all the voltages are not Seal in voltage setting, only the below the FUSEF_U output is activated.
Page 909 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions Three phase network Fault in a measuring circuit between voltage transformer and protection relay e.g. blown fuse REF 615 GUID-FA649B6A-B51E-47E2-8E37-EBA9CDEB2BF5 V2 EN Figure 471: Fault in a circuit from the voltage transformer to the protection relay A fuse failure occurs due to blown fuses, broken wires or intended substation operations.
Page 910 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions Name Type Default Description CB_CLOSED BOOLEAN 0=False Active when circuit breaker is closed DISCON_OPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Active when line disconnector is open MINCB_OPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Active when external MCB opens protected voltage circuit Table 869: SEQSPVC Output signals Name Type...
Page 911 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions 6.5.8 Monitored data Table 872: SEQSPVC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description SEQSPVC Enum 1=on Status 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 6.5.9 Technical data Table 873: SEQSPVC Technical data Characteristic Value NPS function = 1.1 ×...
Page 912 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions 6.6.3 Functionality The runtime counter for machines and devices function MDSOPT calculates and presents the accumulated operation time of a machine or device as the output. The unit of time for accumulation is hour. The function generates a warning and an alarm when the accumulated operation time exceeds the set limits.
Page 913 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions The activation of the WARNING and ALARM outputs depends on the Operating time mode setting. Both WARNING and ALARM occur immediately after the conditions are met if Operating time mode is set to “Immediate”. If Operating time mode is set to “Timed Warn”, WARNING is activated within the next 24 hours at the time of the day set using the Operating time hour setting.
Page 914 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions Table 875: MDSOPT Output signals Name Type Description ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm accumulated operation time exceeds Alarm value WARNING BOOLEAN Warning accumulated operation time exceeds Warning value 6.6.7 Settings Table 876: MDSOPT Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 915 Section 6 1MRS757644 F Supervision functions 6.6.10 Technical revision history Table 880: MDSOPT Technical revision history Technical revision Change Internal improvement. Internal improvement. Internal improvement. 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 917 Section 7 1MRS757644 F Condition monitoring functions Section 7 Condition monitoring functions Circuit-breaker condition monitoring SSCBR 7.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Circuit-breaker condition monitoring SSCBR CBCM CBCM 7.1.2 Function block A070795 V3 EN Figure 474: Function block 7.1.3...
Page 918 Section 7 1MRS757644 F Condition monitoring functions 7.1.4 Operation principle The circuit breaker condition monitoring function includes different metering and monitoring sub-functions. The functions can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are “On” and “Off”. The operation counters are cleared when Operation is set to “Off”.
Page 919 Section 7 1MRS757644 F Condition monitoring functions 7.1.4.1 Circuit breaker status The Circuit breaker status sub-function monitors the position of the circuit breaker, that is, whether the breaker is in open, closed or invalid position. The operation of the breaker status monitoring can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
Page 920 Section 7 1MRS757644 F Condition monitoring functions A071105 V2 EN Figure 477: Functional module diagram for calculating inactive days and alarm for circuit breaker operation monitoring Inactivity timer The module calculates the number of days the circuit breaker has remained inactive, that is, has stayed in the same open or closed state.
Page 921 Section 7 1MRS757644 F Condition monitoring functions contact and the closing of the POSOPEN auxiliary contact. The travel time is also measured between the opening of the POSOPEN auxiliary contact and the closing of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact. A071107 V1 EN Figure 479: Travel time calculation when Travel time Clc mode is “From Pos to Pos”...
Page 922 Section 7 1MRS757644 F Condition monitoring functions GUID-A8C2EB5B-F105-4BF7-B1EC-77D4B8238531 V1 EN Figure 480: Travel time calculation when Travel time Clc mode is “From Cmd to Pos” There is a time difference t between the start of the main contact opening and the OPEN_CB_EXE command.
Page 923 Section 7 1MRS757644 F Condition monitoring functions The operation of the subfunction can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections. A071108 V2 EN Figure 481: Functional module diagram for counting circuit breaker operations Operation counter The operation counter counts the number of operations based on the state change of the binary auxiliary contacts inputs POSCLOSE and POSOPEN.
Page 924 Section 7 1MRS757644 F Condition monitoring functions A071109 V2 EN Figure 482: Functional module diagram for calculating accumulative energy and alarm Accumulated energy calculator This module calculates the accumulated energy I t [(kA) s]. The factor y is set with the Current exponent setting.
Page 925 Section 7 1MRS757644 F Condition monitoring functions exceeds the limit value set with the LO Acc currents Pwr threshold setting, the IPOW_LO output is activated. The IPOW_ALM and IPOW_LO outputs can be blocked by activating the binary input BLOCK. 7.1.4.6 Remaining life of circuit breaker Every time the breaker operates, the life of the circuit breaker reduces due to wearing.
Page 926 Section 7 1MRS757644 F Condition monitoring functions Alarm limit check When the remaining life of any phase drops below the Life alarm level threshold setting, the corresponding circuit breaker life alarm CB_LIFE_ALM is activated. It is possible to deactivate the CB_LIFE_ALM alarm signal by activating the binary input BLOCK.
Page 927 Section 7 1MRS757644 F Condition monitoring functions The operation of the subfunction can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections. A071113 V2 EN Figure 486: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker gas pressure alarm The gas pressure is monitored through the binary input signals PRES_LO_IN and PRES_ALM_IN.
Page 928 Section 7 1MRS757644 F Condition monitoring functions opens, the auxiliary contact B closes and the main contact reaches its opening position. During the closing cycle, the first main contact starts closing. The auxiliary contact B opens, the auxiliary contact A closes and the main contact reaches its closed position. The travel times are calculated based on the state changes of the auxiliary contacts and the adding correction factor to consider the time difference of the main contact's and the auxiliary contact's position change.
Page 929 Section 7 1MRS757644 F Condition monitoring functions A071114 V3 EN Figure 487: Trip Curves for a typical 12 kV, 630 A, 16 kA vacuum interrupter the number of closing-opening operations allowed for the circuit breaker the current at the time of tripping of the circuit breaker Calculation of Directional Coef The directional coefficient is calculated according to the formula: 620 series...
Page 930 Section 7 1MRS757644 F Condition monitoring functions       Directional Coef . 2 2609 = −       (Equation 174) A070794 V2 EN Rated operating current = 630 A Rated fault current = 16 kA Op number rated = 30000 Op number fault = 20 Calculation for estimating the remaining life...
Page 931 Section 7 1MRS757644 F Condition monitoring functions Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block input status POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O PRES_ALM_IN BOOLEAN 0=False Binary pressure alarm input...
Page 932 Section 7 1MRS757644 F Condition monitoring functions 7.1.7 Settings Table 883: SSCBR Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On 5=off Acc stop current 5.00...500.00 0.01 10.00 RMS current setting below which engy acm stops Open alarm time 0...200...
Page 933 Section 7 1MRS757644 F Condition monitoring functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Life alarm level 0...99999 Alarm level for CB remaining life Pressure alarm time 0...60000 Time delay for gas pressure alarm in ms Pres lockout time 0...60000 Time delay for gas pressure lockout in ms Ini inactive days 0...9999...
Page 934 Section 7 1MRS757644 F Condition monitoring functions 7.1.9 Technical data Table 886: SSCBR Technical data Characteristic Value Current measuring accuracy ±1.5% or ±0.002 × I (at currents in the range of 0.1…10 × I ±5.0% (at currents in the range of 10…40 × I Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms Travelling time measurement...
Page 935 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions Section 8 Measurement functions Basic measurements 8.1.1 Functions The three-phase current measurement function CMMXU is used for monitoring and metering the phase currents of the power system. The three-phase voltage measurement function VMMXU is used for monitoring and metering the phase-to-phase voltages of the power system.
Page 936 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions 8.1.2 Measurement functionality The functions can be enabled or disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". Some of the measurement functions operate on two alternative measurement modes: "DFT" and "RMS". The measurement mode is selected with the X Measurement mode setting.
Page 937 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions • Zero-point clamping • Deadband supervision • Limit value supervision In the three-phase voltage measurement function VMMXU the supervision functions are based on the phase-to-phase voltages. However, the phase-to-earth voltage values are also reported with the phase-to-phase voltages.
Page 938 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions Limit value supervision The limit value supervision function indicates whether the measured value of X_INST exceeds or falls below the set limits. The measured value has the corresponding range information X_RANGE and has a value in the range of 0 to 4: •...
Page 939 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions Function Settings for limit value supervision V high limit Three-phase voltage measurement High limit (VMMXU) V low limit Low limit High-high limit V high high limit V low low limit Low-low limit A high limit res Residual current measurement High limit (RESCMMXU)
Page 940 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions GUID-63CA9A0F-24D8-4BA8-A667-88632DF53284 V1 EN Figure 489: Integral deadband supervision The deadband value used in the integral calculation is configured with the X deadband setting. The value represents the percentage of the difference between the maximum and minimum limit in the units of 0.001 percent x seconds.
Page 941 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions Function Settings Maximum/minimum (=range) F deadband Frequency measurement 75/35 (=40 Hz) (FMMXU) Ps Seq A deadband , Ng Seq A 40/0 (=40xIn) Phase sequence current measurement (CSMSQI) deadband , Zro A deadband Ps Seq V deadband , Ng Seq V 4/0 (=4xUn) Phase sequence voltage measurement (VSMSQI)
Page 942 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions GUID-9947B4F2-CD26-4F85-BF57-EAF1593AAE1B V1 EN Figure 490: Complex power and power quadrants Table 891: Power quadrants Quadrant Current Power Lagging 0…+1.00 +ind Lagging 0…-1.00 -cap Leading 0…-1.00 -ind Leading 0…+1.00 +cap The active power P direction can be selected between forward and reverse with Active power Dir and correspondingly the reactive power Q direction can be selected with Reactive power Dir.
Page 943 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions Sequence components The phase-sequence components are calculated using the phase currents and phase voltages. More information on calculating the phase-sequence components can be found in Calculated measurements in this manual. 8.1.3 Measurement function applications The measurement functions are used for power system measurement, supervision and reporting to LHMI, a monitoring tool within PCM600, or to the station level, for example, with IEC 61850.
Page 944 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions 8.1.4.2 Function block A070777 V2 EN Figure 491: Function block 8.1.4.3 Signals Table 892: CMMXU Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for all binary outputs...
Page 945 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions Table 895: CMMXU Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode 2=DFT 8.1.4.5 Monitored data Table 896: CMMXU Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description IL1-A...
Page 946 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description I_RANGE_A Enum 0=normal IL1 Amplitude range 1=high 2=low 3=high-high 4=low-low I_INST_B FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 IL2 Amplitude, magnitude of instantaneous value I_ANGL_B FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 IL2 current angle I_DB_B FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 IL2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value...
Page 947 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions 8.1.4.7 Technical revision history Table 898: CMMXU Technical revision history Technical revision Change Menu changes Phase current angle values added to Monitored data view. Minimum demand value and time added to recorded data. Logarithmic demand calculation mode added and demand interval setting moved under Measurement menu as general setting to all demand calculations.
Page 948 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions Table 900: VMMXU Output signals Name Type Description HIGH_ALARM BOOLEAN High alarm HIGH_WARN BOOLEAN High warning LOW_WARN BOOLEAN Low warning LOW_ALARM BOOLEAN Low alarm 8.1.5.4 Settings Table 901: VMMXU Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step...
Page 949 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description U_ANGL_AB FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 U12 angle U_DB_AB FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 U12 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value U_DMD_AB FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 Demand value of U12 voltage U_RANGE_AB Enum 0=normal U12 Amplitude range 1=high 2=low 3=high-high...
Page 950 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description U_INST_C FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 UL3 Amplitude, magnitude of instantaneous value U_ANGL_C FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 UL3 angle U_DMD_C FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 Demand value of UL3 voltage 8.1.5.6 Technical data Table 904: VMMXU Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy...
Page 951 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions 8.1.6.2 Function block GUID-283FF4B3-BB34-471B-9ADF-0015C67DED72 V1 EN Figure 493: Function block symbol 8.1.6.3 Signals Table 906: VAMMXU Input signals Name Type Default Description U_A_AB SIGNAL Phase-to-earth voltage A or phase-to-phase voltage AB BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for all binary outputs Table 907: VAMMXU Output signals...
Page 952 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions 8.1.6.5 Monitored data Table 910: VAMMXU Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description U12-kV FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 Measured phase to phase voltage amplitude phase AB UL1-kV FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 Measured phase to ground voltage amplitude phase A U_INST_AB FLOAT32...
Page 953 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions 8.1.7 Residual current measurement RESCMMXU 8.1.7.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Residual current measurement RESCMMXU 8.1.7.2 Function block A070778 V2 EN Figure 494: Function block 8.1.7.3 Signals Table 912: RESCMMXU Input signals...
Page 954 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions Table 915: RESCMMXU Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode 2=DFT 8.1.7.5 Monitored data Table 916: RESCMMXU Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Io-A...
Page 955 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions 8.1.7.7 Technical revision history Table 918: RESCMMXU Technical revision history Technical revision Change Residual current angle and demand value added to Monitored data view. Recorded data added for minimum and maximum values with timestamps. Monitored data Min demand Io maximum value range (RESCMSTA2.MinAmps.maxVal.f ) is corrected to 40.00.
Page 956 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions 8.1.8.4 Settings Table 921: RESVMMXU Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On 5=off V Hi high limit res 0.00...4.00 0.20 High alarm voltage limit V high limit res 0.00...4.00 0.05...
Page 957 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions 8.1.8.7 Technical revision history Table 925: RESVMMXU Technical revision history Technical revision Change Residual voltage angle and demand value added to Monitored data view Internal improvement Internal improvement 8.1.9 Frequency measurement FMMXU 8.1.9.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617...
Page 958 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions 8.1.9.5 Settings Table 927: FMMXU Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On 5=off F high high limit 35.00...75.00 60.00 High alarm frequency limit F high limit 35.00...75.00 55.00...
Page 959 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions 8.1.9.8 Technical revision history Table 931: FMMXU Technical revision history Technical revision Change Def frequency Sel . Frequency Added new setting measurement range lowered from 35 Hz to 10 Hz. 8.1.10 Sequence current measurement CSMSQI 8.1.10.1 Identification Function description...
Page 960 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Ps Seq A low limit 0.00...40.00 0.00 Low warning current limit for positive sequence current Ps Seq A low low Lim 0.00...40.00 0.00 Low alarm current limit for positive sequence current Ps Seq A deadband 100...100000...
Page 961 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description I2_DB FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Negative sequence current amplitude, reported value I2_RANGE Enum 0=normal Negative sequence 1=high current amplitude range 2=low 3=high-high 4=low-low I1_INST FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Positive sequence current amplitude, instantaneous value I1_ANGL FLOAT32...
Page 962 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions 8.1.10.7 Technical revision history Table 936: CSMSQI Technical revision history Technical revision Change Sequence current angle values added to the Monitored data view. Internal improvement. 8.1.11 Sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI 8.1.11.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2...
Page 963 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions 8.1.11.4 Settings Table 938: VSMSQI Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On 5=off Ps Seq V Hi high Lim 0.00...4.00 1.40 High alarm voltage limit for positive sequence voltage Ps Seq V high limit 0.00...4.00...
Page 964 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions 8.1.11.5 Monitored data Table 939: VSMSQI Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description NgSeq-kV FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 Measured negative sequence voltage PsSeq-kV FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 Measured positive sequence voltage ZroSeq-kV FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 Measured zero sequence voltage U2_INST FLOAT32...
Page 965 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions 8.1.11.6 Technical data Table 940: VSMSQI Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage measured: f ±2 Hz At voltages in range 0.01…1.15 × U ±1.0% or ±0.002 × U Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n ×...
Page 966 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions 8.1.12.4 Settings Table 942: PEMMXU Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On 5=off Power unit Mult 3=Kilo 3=Kilo Unit multiplier for presentation of the 6=Mega power related values Energy unit Mult...
Page 967 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description P_INST FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 Active power, magnitude 99.9 of instantaneous value P_DB FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 Active power, magnitude 99.9 of reported value P_DMD FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 Demand value of active 99.9 power Q_INST FLOAT32...
Page 968 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Time min dmd P Timestamp Time of minimum demand Time max dmd Q Timestamp Time of maximum demand Time min dmd Q Timestamp Time of minimum demand 8.1.12.6 Technical data Table 945: PEMMXU Technical data...
Page 969 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions By default, the binary channels are set to record external or internal relay signals, for example, the start or trip signals of the relay stages, or external blocking or control signals. Binary relay signals, such as protection start and trip signals, or an external relay control signal via a binary input, can be set to trigger the recording.
Page 970 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions Triggering by analog channels The trigger level can be set for triggering in a limit violation situation. The user can set the limit values with the High trigger level and Low trigger level parameters of the corresponding analog channel.
Page 971 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions The maximum number of recordings is 100. 8.2.1.4 Sampling frequencies The sampling frequency of the disturbance recorder analog channels depends on the set rated frequency. One fundamental cycle always contains the amount of samples set with the Storage rate parameter.
Page 972 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions A070835 V1 EN Figure 500: Disturbance recorder file naming The naming convention of 8+3 characters is used in COMTRADE file naming. The file name is composed of the last two octets of the protection relay's IP number and a running counter, which has a range of 1...9999.
Page 973 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions mode parameter of the corresponding analog channel or binary channel, the Stor. mode manual parameter for manual trigger and the Stor. mode periodic parameter for periodic trigger. In the waveform mode, the samples are captured according to the Storage rate and Pre-trg length parameters.
Page 974 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions important to have the latest recordings in the memory. The saturation mode is preferred, when the oldest recordings are more important. New triggerings are blocked in both the saturation and the overwrite mode until the previous recording is completed.
Page 975 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions combined with logical functions, for example AND and OR. The name of the binary channel can be configured and modified by writing the new name to the Channel id text parameter of the corresponding binary channel. Note that the Channel id text parameter is used in COMTRADE configuration files as a channel identifier.
Page 976 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions The disturbance recorder follows the 1999 version of the COMTRADE standard and uses the binary data file format. 8.2.4 Settings Table 948: RDRE Non-group general settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Disturbance...
Page 977 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions Table 949: RDRE Non-group channel settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Analog 5=off channel is enabled or disabled Channel 0=Disabled 0=Disabled Select the selection 1=Io signal to be 2=IL1 recorded by 3=IL2 this channel.
Page 978 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions Table 950: RDRE Non-group binary channel settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 5=off Binary 5=off channel is enabled or disabled Level trigger 1=Positive or 1=Rising Level trigger mode Rising mode for the 2=Negative or binary Falling...
Page 979 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions 8.2.5 Monitored data Table 952: RDRE Monitored data Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Number of 0...100 Number of recordings recordings currently in memory Rem. amount 0...100 Remaining of rec. amount of recordings that fit into the available recording...
Page 980 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions Tap changer position indication TPOSYLTC 8.3.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Tap changer position indication TPOSYLTC TPOSM 8.3.2 Function block GUID-D31468A2-778A-4FF6-A9DE-3508934B6789 V1 EN Figure 501: Function block 8.3.3 Functionality The tap changer position indication function TPOSYLTC is used for transformer tap...
Page 981 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions GUID-D3B3C7DB-1E8C-4189-9554-77C8B5ACD17D V1 EN Figure 502: Functional module diagram Tap position decoder When there is a wired connection to the TAP_POS input connector, the corresponding tap changer position is decoded from the mA or RTD input. When there is no wired connection to the TAP_POS connector, the binary inputs are expected to be used for the tap changer position information.
Page 982 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions An additional separate input, SIGN_BIT, can be used for negative values. If the values are positive, the input is set to FALSE (0). If the SIGN_BIT is set to TRUE (1) making the number negative, the remaining bits are identical to those of the coded positive number.
Page 983 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions Inputs TAP_POS outputs 8.3.5 Application TPOSYLTC provides tap position information for other functions as a signed integer value that can be fed to the tap position input. The position information of the tap changer can be coded in various methods for many applications, for example, the differential protection algorithms.
Page 984 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions connected to input 1 (AI_VAL1) of the X130 (RTD) card. The tap changer operating range from the minimum to maximum turns of the tap and a corresponding mA signal for the tap position are set in XRGGIO130. Since the values of the XRGGIO130 outputs are floating point numbers, the float to integer (T_F32_INT8) conversion is needed before the tap position information can be fed to TPOSYLTC.
Page 985 Section 8 1MRS757644 F Measurement functions 8.3.7 Settings Table 957: TPOSYLTC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on 1=on Operation Off / On 5=off Operation mode 1=NAT2INT 2=BCD2INT Operation mode selection 2=BCD2INT 3=GRAY2INT 8.3.8 Monitored data Table 958: TPOSYLTC Monitored data...
Page 987 Section 9 1MRS757644 F Control functions Section 9 Control functions Circuit breaker control CBXCBR, Disconnector control DCXSWI and Earthing switch control ESXSWI 9.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Circuit-breaker control CBXCBR I<->O CB I<->O CB Disconnector control DCXSWI...
Page 988 Section 9 1MRS757644 F Control functions 9.1.3 Functionality CBXCBR, DCXSWI and ESXSWI are intended for circuit breaker, disconnector and earthing switch control and status information purposes. These functions execute commands and evaluate block conditions and different time supervision conditions. The functions perform an execution command only if all conditions indicate that a switch operation is allowed.
Page 989 Section 9 1MRS757644 F Control functions comes from the interlocking, and SYNC_OK comes from the synchronism and energizing check. The input SYNC_ITL_BYP can be used for bypassing this control. The SYNC_ITL_BYP input can be used to activate CLOSE_ENAD discarding the ENA_CLOSE and SYNC_OK input states.
Page 990 Section 9 1MRS757644 F Control functions GUID-36839B06-10FE-46FA-8289-5AA1EBBCD0FA V1 EN Figure 506: Condition for enabling the close request (CL_REQ) for CBXCBR When the open command is given from communication, via LHMI or activating the AU_OPEN input, it is processed only if OPEN_ENAD is TRUE. OP_REQ output is also available.
Page 991 Section 9 1MRS757644 F Control functions GUID-B85B9772-2F20-4BC3-A3AE-90989F4817E2 V1 EN Figure 508: OPEN and CLOSE outputs logic for CBXCBR Opening and closing pulse widths The pulse width type can be defined with the Adaptive pulse setting. The function provides two modes to characterize the opening and closing pulse widths. When the Adaptive pulse is set to “TRUE”, it causes a variable pulse width, which means that the output pulse is deactivated when the object state shows that the apparatus has entered the correct state.
Page 992 Section 9 1MRS757644 F Control functions • Command authority: ensures that the command source is authorized to operate the object • Mutual exclusion: ensures that only one command source at a time can control the object • Interlocking: allows only safe commands •...
Page 993 Section 9 1MRS757644 F Control functions Local/Remote operations The local/remote selection affects CBXCBR, DCXSWI and ESXSWI. • Local: the opening and closing via communication is disabled. • Remote: the opening and closing via LHMI is disabled. • AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE inputs function regardless of the local/remote selection.
Page 994 Section 9 1MRS757644 F Control functions 9.1.6 Signals Table 962: CBXCBR Input signals Name Type Default Description POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O ENA_OPEN BOOLEAN 1=True Enables opening...
Page 995 Section 9 1MRS757644 F Control functions Name Type Default Description BLK_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks closing AU_OPEN BOOLEAN 0=False 1)2) Executes the command for open direction AU_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False Executes the command for close direction 1)2) ITL_BYPASS BOOLEAN 0=False Discards ENA_OPEN and ENA_CLOSE interlocking when TRUE 1) Not available for monitoring 2) Always direct operation...
Page 996 Section 9 1MRS757644 F Control functions Name Type Description CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus closed position OKPOS BOOLEAN Apparatus position is ok OPEN_ENAD BOOLEAN Opening is enabled based on the input status CLOSE_ENAD BOOLEAN Closing is enabled based on the input status 9.1.7 Settings Table 968:...
Page 997 Section 9 1MRS757644 F Control functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Control model 0=status-only 4=sbo-with- Select control model 1=direct-with- enhanced-security normal-security 4=sbo-with- enhanced-security Operation timeout 10...60000 30000 Timeout for negative termination Identification DCXSWI1 switch Control Object identification position Table 971: DCXSWI Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter...
Page 998 Section 9 1MRS757644 F Control functions 9.1.8 Monitored data Table 974: CBXCBR Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description POSITION Dbpos 0=intermediate Apparatus position 1=open indication 2=closed 3=faulty Table 975: DCXSWI Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description POSITION Dbpos 0=intermediate...
Page 999 Section 9 1MRS757644 F Control functions Table 979: ESXSWI Technical revision history Technical revision Change Maximum and default values changed to 60 s and Event delay settings. Default 10 s respectively for Operation timeout value changed to 30 s for setting.
Page 1000 Section 9 1MRS757644 F Control functions 9.2.4 Operation principle Status indication and validity check The object state is defined by the two digital inputs POSOPEN and POSCLOSE, which are also available as outputs OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS together with the OKPOS according to Table 980.
Page 1001 Section 9 1MRS757644 F Control functions Table 982: ESSXSWI Input signals Name Type Default Description POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O 1) Not available for monitoring Table 983: DCSXSWI Output signals Name...
Page 1002 Section 9 1MRS757644 F Control functions Table 988: ESSXSWI Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Event delay 0...60000 30000 Event delay of the intermediate position Vendor External equipment vendor Serial number External equipment serial number Model External equipment model 9.2.8...
Page 1003 Section 9 1MRS757644 F Control functions Synchronism and energizing check SECRSYN 9.3.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Synchronism and energizing check SECRSYN SYNC 9.3.2 Function block GUID-9270E059-ED17-4355-90F0-3345E1743464 V2 EN Figure 513: Function block 9.3.3 Functionality The synchronism and energizing check function SECRSYN checks the condition...
Page 1004 Section 9 1MRS757644 F Control functions 9.3.4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". SECRSYN has two parallel functionalities, the synchro check and energizing check functionality. The operation of SECRSYN can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
Page 1005 Section 9 1MRS757644 F Control functions Table 993: Live dead mode of operation under which switching can be carried out Live dead mode Description Both Dead Both line and bus de-energized Live L, Dead B Bus de-energized and line energized Dead L, Live B Line de-energized and bus energized Dead Bus, L Any...
Page 1006 Section 9 1MRS757644 F Control functions • In the synchronous mode, the closing is attempted so that the phase difference at closing is close to zero. • The synchronous mode is only possible when the frequency slip is below 0.1 percent of the value of f •...
Page 1007 Section 9 1MRS757644 F Control functions Closing angle = ∠ − ∠ ° + − × × ° Line line (Equation 182) GUID-48292FC2-C00C-4166-BCAD-FFC77D7F196B V1 EN ∠ U Measured bus voltage phase angle ∠U Measured line voltage phase angle Line Measured bus frequency Measured line frequency line Total circuit breaker closing delay, including the delay of the protection relay output contacts...

ABB RELION 620 Series Technical Manual

Section 1 Introduction

Section 2 620 Series Overview

Section 3 Basic Functions

Quick Links

Related Manuals for ABB RELION 620 Series

Summary of Contents for ABB RELION 620 Series